Continuing Professional Development

Distance Learning

 

 Circulation of the below listing is endorsed by: 

General Hypnotherapy Register

 

Price Match: If you can book onto any of the CPD courses featured for less tell us and we will match the price.
 

N.B. GHR Registrants:
Attendance at any of the below courses will count towards the GHR's annual CPD requirement for continued registration.
To view the GHR's CPD Policy 
click here

CPD Data Sheets, to log your CPD activity, are available to download from the GHR website Members Area click here

 

 

 

 

Academy of the Inner Mind
Dr Claire Jack
Location: Self-Pace or Zoom (see below)

 

Claire Jack, Ph.D. delivers a wide range of training courses and workshops designed to meet clients’ needs and provide students not just with a comprehensive understanding of a range of subjects, but with hands-on practice and all the client resources and handouts they need. AIM offers a range of exclusive, trademarked courses which meet the growing demand for therapist specialisation in particular areas.

 

Ref No: 2879
Beyond Trauma Practitioner Training: Hypnotherapy for PTSD, CPTSD and general trauma course
Self-paced
GHR discount £149 (standard fee £299)
Beyond Trauma is a comprehensive, trauma-informed approach to working with PTSD, Complex PTSD and the lasting effects of trauma. Rather than focusing solely on revisiting traumatic memories, this programme recognises that recovery begins with helping clients feel safer, regulate their nervous system and reconnect with themselves. Integrating contemporary neuroscience, memory reconsolidation, somatic approaches and evidence-informed hypnotherapy, it provides a structured yet flexible framework for supporting clients throughout every stage of recovery.
You'll learn how trauma affects the brain, body and nervous system, why symptoms persist long after danger has passed, and how to help clients build resilience, expand their Window of Tolerance and develop lasting emotional regulation. Where trauma processing is appropriate, the course introduces a range of carefully paced interventions—including symbolic reprocessing, imagery rescripting, ego state therapy, affect bridge work and hypnotic exposure—within an ethical, collaborative and trauma-informed framework.
Rather than offering a one-size-fits-all protocol, Beyond Trauma teaches practitioners how to adapt their approach to the individual sitting in front of them. Combining a complete eight-session therapeutic programme with practical resources, scripts and recordings, this training provides a powerful, evidence-informed model that enables practitioners to work confidently, compassionately and safely with clients affected by trauma.
Course provider:
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning outcomes:
Learning Outcomes
Beyond Trauma: Trauma-Informed Hypnotherapy for PTSD and Complex PTSD
Welcome and Introduction
•Welcome
•Meeting Client Demand
•Who Are Your Clients?
Module 1 – Understanding Trauma
•What is Trauma?
•Big "T" and Little "t" Trauma
•Adverse Childhood Experiences (ACEs) and Beyond
•Trauma Does Not Always Lead to PTSD
•Why Trauma-Informed Care Matters
•Trauma and the Mind-Body Connection
•Trauma and the Window of Tolerance
•Protective Factors, Resilience and Recovery
•Common Myths About Trauma
Module 2 – Understanding Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD)
•What is PTSD?
•How PTSD Develops
•PTSD Symptoms
•The PTSD Cycle: Why Symptoms Persist
•Distinguishing PTSD from Other Conditions
•Diagnosis, Scope of Practice and Trauma-Informed Assessment
•Prognosis, Recovery and Long-Term Outcomes
•Module Summary
Module 3 – Understanding Complex Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder (Complex PTSD)
•What is Complex PTSD?
•PTSD versus Complex PTSD
•Emotional Regulation and the Nervous System
•Attachment and Relationships
•Identity, Shame and the Inner Critic
•Dissociation
•The Body in Complex Trauma
•Neurodivergence and Complex Trauma
•Module Summary
Module 4 – The Neuroscience and Physiology of Trauma
•Understanding Key Brain Regions
•Why Traumatic Memories Feel Different
•Understanding the Nervous System
Module 5 – The Beyond Trauma Protocol
•A Note on Dissociation and Contraindications
•A Note on Inductions
•An Evidence-Informed Approach
•Retaining an Open Mind
•Pre-Session Contact
•Client Intake
Module 6 – Choosing the Therapeutic Path
•Creating a Personalised Trauma Recovery Plan
•The Session Four Pathway Discussion
•There Is No Single Road to Recovery
•Why Trauma Processing Isn't Always Helpful (or Desired)
•Learning to Live Well Alongside Trauma
•Following the Client Rather Than the Protocol
•Readiness for Change
•Knowing When Enough Is Enough
•Building a Trauma-Informed Toolkit
Module 7 – Building Recovery
•Overview
•Having a Purpose
•Stabilisation
•Encouraging Cognitive Flexibility
•Rebuilding Identity
•Self-Compassion
•Acceptance
•Creating Safety in Everyday Life
•Returning to Living
•Building Confidence and Self-Efficacy
•Hope
•Strengths-Based Recovery
Module 8 – Working with Traumatic Memories
•Overview
•Memory Reconsolidation
•Ego State Therapy
•Imagery Rescripting
•Affect Bridge
•Hypnotic Exposure
•Somatic Reprocessing and Healing
•Symbolic Reprocessing
•Regression
Clinical Protocol
Session 1 – Finding Safety
Session 2 – Acceptance and Psychological Flexibility
Session 3 – Identity and Reconnecting with Self
Session 4 – Hope and Moving Forward
Session 5 – Symbolic Reprocessing and Emotional Learning
Session 6 – Integrating Past and Present
Session 7 – Trauma Memory Activation and Integration
Session 8 – Somatic Healing and Whole-Self Integration
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
After you have attended the Beyond Trauma workshop you will receive access to an online portal with extensive materials, including video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, clear protocols, resources and practitioner guides. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion of the live workshop, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively work with female entrepreneurs, and continue your own entrepreneurial journey.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2880
Diploma in Mindfulness-Hypnotherapy
Self-paced
GHR discount £79 (standard fee £95)
Mindfulness and hypnotherapy are highly complementary approaches, both helping clients develop greater awareness of their thoughts, emotions and physical experiences while changing the way they respond to them. This specialist programme brings mindfulness principles and hypnotherapeutic techniques together, giving you practical ways to support clients experiencing stress, anxiety, overwhelm and other common therapeutic issues. You’ll explore key mindfulness concepts and learn how to integrate them naturally into hypnosis, rather than treating mindfulness as a completely separate approach. Through practical techniques, scripts and therapeutic exercises, you’ll develop the confidence to create sessions that encourage present-moment awareness, greater acceptance and more flexible responses to difficult thoughts and feelings.
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
What is Mindfulness?
•The Origins and Development of Mindfulness
•Core Principles of Mindfulness
•Mindfulness and the Brain
•Attention, Awareness and the Present Moment
•Therapeutic Applications of Mindfulness
•Evidence for Mindfulness-Based Approaches
•When Mindfulness May Not Be Appropriate
•Potential Drawbacks and Practitioner Considerations
Mindfulness-Hypnotherapy
•Why Combine Mindfulness and Hypnotherapy?
•How Mindfulness Changes the Therapeutic Use of Hypnosis
•The Mindfulness-Hypnotherapy Protocol
•Assessing Whether Mindfulness is Right for Your Client
•Introducing Mindfulness to Clients
•Present-Moment Awareness Within Hypnosis
•Working With Thoughts Without Trying to Eliminate Them
•Awareness of Emotions and Physical Sensations
•Acceptance, Curiosity and Non-Judgement
•Integrating Mindfulness Into Hypnotic Suggestions
•Mindfulness Between Hypnotherapy Sessions
•Developing Individualised Mindfulness Practices
Clean Language Metaphor Mindfulness
•Introduction to Clean Language
•Combining Clean Language With Mindfulness
•Helping Clients Notice Their Own Internal Experience
•Working With Client-Generated Metaphor
•Using Clean Questions Within Hypnosis
•Clean Language Mindfulness Practice
•Integrating Metaphor, Mindfulness and Hypnosis
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
The Diploma in Mindfulness-Hypnotherapy is structured to provide a flexible and comprehensive learning experience for hypnotherapists. Delivered through a combination of video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, resources and practitioner guides, the course is divided into clear, self-paced modules. These modules cover the foundation of Mindfulness-Hypnotherapy, client management strategies, and marketing your services. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively implement mindfulness in your practice.

 

Book Now          Contact us
 

Ref No: 2871
Hypnosis Through Nature®: Outdoor therapy course
Self-paced
GHR discount £149 (standard fee £299)
Brief Description of Event:
Hypnosis Through Nature® takes your work outdoors in a way that is so much more than “outdoor therapy” or “walking and talking therapy”. You will learn to bring in a core hypnotherapeutic skill of utilisation to use meaning, sensations and symbolism of the landscape to transform your practice and transform your clients’ experience. You’ll learn how to work with both individuals and groups. Receive a bonus Therapy Through Nature (TTN®) Certification for situations when you’d prefer to apply a more counselling or coaching approach.
The benefits of outdoor therapy are strongly supported by research. This is one of the fastest growing areas in therapy and the number of people who have experienced outdoor therapy has almost doubled since before the pandemic. Outdoor therapy is strongly supported by evidence that shows being outdoors can impact people at a cellular level, improve immune system function, reduce stress and anxiety levels.
This is so much more than usual “outdoor therapy” or “walking and talking” therapeutic approaches, as it specifically draws on utilisation and provides clear guidelines about how to use your usual hypnotherapeutic skills – including inductions, ego-strengthening and post-hypnotic suggestions – in outdoor settings.
Only students who have undertaken this training can use the trademarked titles Hypnosis Through Nature® and TTN® (Therapy Through Nature) which is essential in marketing your services to both individuals and groups.
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today’s in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you’re a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy’s courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, risk assessments, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning Objectives:
During this course you will learn about:
What is Nature Therapy?
•Overview
•What is Hypnosis Through Nature®?
•Hypnosis Through Nature® Practitioner Status
•Therapeutic Benefits of Nature Therapy
•Research findings
•Limitations
•Practical Considerations
Utilising Natural Elements
•Overview
•Using Landscape Points as Session Markers
•Using symbols
•Working with sensations
•Why Nature Works With Hypnosis
Practical Considerations (Ethics, Safety, Setup)
•Overview
•Informed Consent
•Confidentiality
•Risk Assessment
•Weather and Seasonal Changes
•Insurance
•Cancellation Policy
•Providing Information
•Process Contracting
•Assessing Client Needs
Hypnosis Through Nature® Protocol
•Overview
•Discover 9 Transitional Phases and how to use them
•Discover how to work with the four nature elements
•Create a four session structure
•Examples with videos of using the outdoors
Working With Groups
•Overview
•Group Size and Composition
•Location Suitability
•Safety and Risk Management
•Theme Selection and Symbolism
•Structure and Pacing
•Practical Logistics
•Participant Preparation and Expectations
•Facilitation and Group Management
•Ethical and Practical Considerations
•Knowing the Landscape in Advance
•Closure and Integration
•Taking Group Work Further
•Marketing Your Group: Getting the Message Clear
•Choosing Format: One-off, Themed, or Regular Meeting
•Group Work as a Pathway to 1-2-1 Work
•Working With Corporate Groups
•Providing Information (Groups)
•Group Risk Assessment
•Group Intake Form
•Group Insurance
Scripts and Session Templates
•Earth Session Templates and Scripts
•Air Session Templates and Scripts
•Water Session Templates and Scripts
•Light Session Templates and Scripts
Practitioner Resources (Including Risk Assessments)
•Individual Client Confidentiality Form and Disclaimer
•Individual Client Reschedule Agreement
•Group Risk Assessment Template
•Group Intake Form and Disclaimer
•Individual Client Risk Assessment
•Group Information Handout
•Individual Client Intake Form
•Logo
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH. You have the option of gaining certification through working through all the course materials or submitting an optional assignment for marking. This second option qualifies you for 10 hours CPD.
Course Structure:
The Hypnosis Through Nature® Practitioner Course is structured to provide a flexible and comprehensive learning experience for hypnotherapists. In addition to the live workshop, you’ll receive access to an online portal which contains video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, resources and practitioner guides. The course is divided into clear, self-paced modules. These modules cover the foundation of the Hypnosis Through Nature® techniques, client management strategies, and marketing your services. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to practice as a qualified Hypnosis Through Nature® Practitioner.


Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2869
Past Lives, Present Healing: Past life regression with Dr. Claire Jack
Self-paced
GHR discount £149 (standard fee £299)
Become a Past Lives, Present Healing Practitioner and gain the skills to confidently and safely guide clients through past life regression as part of a therapeutic, integrative approach. Resources include two full past life sessions. This comprehensive training is designed for practitioners who want to explore the potential of regression work while remaining grounded, ethical and respectful of each client’s individual beliefs.
The course provides a clear, structured approach to past life regression, taking you through every stage of the process—from preparing clients and establishing safety through to regression, exploring significant experiences, working with transitions and between-lives experiences, and integrating insights into the client’s present life.
Rather than requiring you or your clients to believe that past lives are objectively real, Past Lives, Present Healing explores spiritual, psychological, symbolic and archetypal ways of understanding regression experiences. You’ll learn how to work with whatever emerges without imposing interpretations or making assumptions, keeping the focus firmly on therapeutic meaning, healing and positive change in the present.
You’ll explore how regression experiences can support emotional resolution, meaning-making, cognitive reframing, identity and the release of repeating patterns. Particular attention is given to the therapeutic use of language, working with different sensory and processing styles, managing expectations, responding when clients experience little or nothing, and safely navigating emotionally intense material.
By the end of the programme, you’ll have a practical framework, structured protocols and adaptable scripts to confidently incorporate past life regression into your therapeutic practice—helping clients explore the past, however they understand it, in ways that can bring insight, resolution and healing into their lives today.
Course provider
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning Outcomes
Foundations of Past Life Regression
•What is Past Life Regression?
•Why Clients Seek Past Life Regression
•The Therapeutic Goals of Regression
•Past Life Regression vs Age Regression
•Common Myths and Misconceptions
The History of Past Life Regression
•Ancient Beliefs About Reincarnation
•Eastern and Western Perspectives
•Regression in Modern Hypnotherapy
•The Evolution of Past Life Regression
Different Ways of Understanding Regression
•The Spiritual Perspective
•The Psychological Perspective
•The Symbolic Perspective
•The Archetypal Perspective
•The Unconscious Mind as Storyteller
•Does It Matter Whether It Is Real?
•Focusing on Therapeutic Outcomes
•Why Regression Feels Real
Research Findings
•Research into Past Life Regression
•Case Studies and Common Themes
•Scientific Criticisms
•Remaining Within Your Scope of Practice
Why Regression Can Be Therapeutic
•Emotional Resolution
•Meaning-Making
•Identity Reconstruction
•Cognitive Reframing
•Somatic Change
•Integration
Client Expectations
•Setting Expectations
•Explaining Different Possible Experiences
•Removing the Pressure to See Things
•Working with Different Sensory Styles
•Establishing an Intention
•Explaining Different Models of Regression
•Working Without Making Claims
•Managing Client Beliefs
Creating Safety
•Resource Development
•Grounding
•Safe Place Work
•Anchors
•Returning to Present Awareness
The Use of Language
•Using Permissive Language
•Using the Client's Own Language
•Avoiding Assumptive Language
•Working with Uncertainty
•The Therapeutic Use of Silence
•Encouraging Description Before Interpretation
•Using Present-Tense Language
•Language That Supports Safety
•Adapting Your Language to Different Experiences
Creating the Regression Experience
•Preparing for Regression
•Inductions for Regression
•Deepening Techniques
•How Many Sessions?
Reflecting on the Lifetime
•Reviewing the Life
•Childhood and Early Experiences
•Establishing Identity
•Lessons Learned
•Unfinished Experiences
•Talents and Strengths
•Relationships Revisited
•Compassion and Forgiveness
•Understanding Repeating Patterns
The Transition
•Experiencing the End of the Lifetime
•Helping Clients Leave the Scene Safely
•Observing Rather Than Re-experiencing
•Feelings of Release
•Moving into a State of Reflection
•Meeting Familiar Energies or Symbolic Figures
•Returning Home
•When No Transition Naturally Occurs
Between Lives
•Soul Awareness
•Meeting Guides or Wise Figures
•Soul Groups
•Places of Learning
•Healing Between Lives
•Life Purpose
•Working with Symbolic Experiences
Bringing Experiences into the Present
•Releasing Emotional Patterns
•Healing Relationships
•Reclaiming Strengths
•Completing Unfinished Experiences
•Transforming Limiting Beliefs
•Receiving Resources
•Integrating Learning into Everyday Life
What if Past Lives Aren't Really Past Lives?
•Does Healing Require Objective Truth?
•Dreams, Symbolism and Psychological Reality
•Jung and the Collective Unconscious
•The Unconscious as a Creative Storyteller
•Why Symbolic Experiences Can Produce Lasting Change
•Helping Clients Find Their Own Meaning
•Focusing on Therapeutic Outcomes Rather Than Proving Beliefs
Responding to Potential Issues
•When Clients Experience Nothing
•Emotional Overwhelm
•Distressing Death Scenes
•Confusion During Regression
•Working Within Professional Boundaries
•Ending Sessions Safely
Becoming a Past Life Regression Practitioner
•Integrating Regression into Hypnotherapy
•Building Confidence
•Marketing Past Life Regression
•Ethical Practice
Pre-Session Preparation
•Overview
•Clarity of Information
•Pre-Session Recording
•Client Intake Form
Session Protocol
•Overview
•How Many Lives Do We Work With?
•Stage 1 – Welcome and Discussion
•Stage 2 – Safe Place
•Stage 3 – The Induction
•Stage 4 – Regression Transition
•Stage 5 – Experiencing the Lifetime
•Stage 6 – Completing the Lifetime
•Stage 7 – Life Between Lives
•Stage 8 – Visiting a Second Past Life
•Stage 9 – Reintegration and Return
•Further Sessions
Case Studies and Real-Life Application
•Overview
•Case Study 1 – Serena
•Case Study 2 – David
•Case Study 3 – Amir
•Case Study 4 – Elizabeth
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
After you have attended the Past Live, Present Healing workshop you will receive access to an online portal with extensive materials, including video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, clear protocols, resources and practitioner guides. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion of the live workshop, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively incorporate past life regression into your client work.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2870
NDHypno® with Dr. Claire Jack: Neurodivergent Hypnotherapy Training
Live Zoom 2 Day Workshop
Saturday 28th November - Sunday 29th November 2026, 9.30am - 4.30pm
Self-paced version also available
GHR discount £199 (standard fee £399)
NDHypno® Practitioner Training
One of the problems with training to work with neurodivergent clients, including autistic and ADHD clients, is that most courses focus on one aspect of that work – how to establish a neuro-affirming practice. Whilst this is important, and is covered in Day 1 of this training programme, NDHypno® also teaches you how to adapt your hypnotherapy approach to work with clients’ unique processing styles. Developed by Dr. Claire Jack, an AuDHD late diagnosed woman who has been a leading voice in neurodivergent therapy for the last decade, this course helps you take your clear understanding of neurodivergence to the practicalities of delivering hypnotherapy effectively and ethically. Rather than adapting therapy simply according to a diagnostic label, NDHypno®, a trademarked course with accompanying logos and resources, looks at how each client processes information, communicates, experiences their internal world and responds to therapeutic interventions.
Day 1 of the training begins with the essential foundations of neurodivergent-affirming practice, including effective communication, sensory considerations, recognising potential neurodivergence, discussing neurodivergence appropriately with clients and understanding how apparently similar presentations can reflect very different needs.
Day 2 explores the complex range of neurodivergent processing styles and learn how to make thoughtful adaptations to hypnosis without making assumptions about what a neurodivergent client will or won't respond to.
Alongside developing the flexibility to work with the individual in front of you, NDHypno® provides a clear therapeutic framework for addressing experiences commonly encountered by neurodivergent clients. This framework means that you can adapt your usual way of working to anything your neurodivergent clients might present with, from anxiety, to weight loss, to confidence issues and phobias.
You'll also learn a structured three-session protocol focusing on foundations of self-acceptance and validation, releasing shame and reframing past experiences, and recognising neurodivergent skills and integrating these into a more positive sense of self.
NDHypno® Practitioner Training is one complete course comprising two essential elements: Diploma in Establishing a Neurodivergent-Affirming Practice and NDHypno® Practitioner Training. Both elements must be completed to qualify as an NDHypno® Practitioner and use the associated practitioner title and logo.
The complete course can be studied through the two-day live workshop or as a self-paced online training programme. If attending both workshop days isn't possible, either one or both elements can instead be completed through a self-paced online course. This provides flexibility in how you undertake the training while ensuring that everyone qualifying as an NDHypno® Practitioner has completed both essential elements of the programme.
Those attending any part of the live training also receive access to the online course materials, providing ongoing access to the complete training.
Course provider:
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning Outcomes:
Day 1/ Diploma in Establishing a Neurodivergent-Affirming Practice
Understanding Neurodivergence
•What is Neurodivergence?
•Non-Developmental Conditions
•Why Might Someone Be Neurodivergent?
Therapy and Coaching for Neurodivergent Clients
•Is a Comprehensive Approach Possible?
•Does My Client Need a Diagnosis to Apply This Approach?
Considerations for Autistic Clients
•Some Core Features of Autism
•Understanding Different Levels of Autism
•Social Experience
•Communication
•Sensory Experience
•Routine and Predictability
•Interests
•Thinking and Processing
•Emotional Regulation
•AuDHD
•PDA Profiles
Considerations for ADHD Clients
•Overview
•Attention and Focus
•Impulsivity and Self-Control
•Organisation and Time Management
•Restlessness and Activity Levels
•Motivation and Task Initiation
•Emotional Sensitivity and Regulation
•Working Memory
•Creativity and Problem Solving
•Medication
Practical Aspects of Working with Neurodivergent Clients
•Overview
•The Importance of the Intake Form
•Physical and Sensory Needs Checklist
•Guidelines for Creating a Sensory-Friendly Environment
Resources
•Client Intake Form
•Preferred Communication Style Checklist
•What to Expect in Our Sessions
•Clarification and Check-In Prompts
•Session Summary for Clients
•Observations and Supportive Responses
•Physical and Sensory Needs Checklist
•Guidelines for Creating a Sensory-Friendly Environment
•Practitioner Guidelines for Scoring Processing Style
•Q&A for Website
•Logo
Other Neurodivergent Conditions
•Working with Dyslexia, Dyscalculia and Dyspraxia
Communicating Effectively
•Communication Resources
•Preferred Communication Style Checklist
•What to Expect in Our Sessions
•Clarification and Check-In Prompts
•Session Summary for Clients
•Observations and Supportive Responses
Noticing Neurodivergence
•Overview
•Picking Up on Behaviours During Sessions
•Descriptions of "Unusual" Behaviours or Experiences
•Disruptive Life Patterns
•A Sense of "Difference"
•Couldn't These Things Represent Trauma (or Something Else)?
•Developmental Significance
•Stored Videos
How to Respond to a Potentially Neurodivergent Client
•Should I Mention Neurodivergence?
•Next Steps
•The Diagnostic Process
Marketing a Neurodivergent-Affirming Practice
•What Does Neurodivergent-Affirming Practice Look Like?
•Neurodivergent-Affirming Language
•National and International Campaigns
•Connecting with Other Practitioners and Organisations
What Are Clients Seeking Therapy or Coaching For?
•Overlap with Other Clients
•Social Relationships
•Intimate Relationships
•Recognising and Responding to Camouflaging
•Burnout
•Executive Function
•Neurodivergent-Based Shame
•Workplace Problems
Camouflaging
•What is Camouflaging?
•Helping Clients Explore Other People's Perspectives
•The Process of Unmasking
Adapting Coaching and Therapy to Neurodivergent Processing Styles
•Different Processing Profiles
•Establishing Your Client's Processing Style
Day 2/ NDHypno® Practitioner Training
Hypnotherapy for Neurodivergent Clients
•Is a Comprehensive Approach Possible?
•Responding to the Complexity of Neurodivergence
•Moving Beyond Diagnoses
Adapting Hypnosis to Neurodivergent Processing Styles
•Different Processing Profiles
•Measures to Adapt Hypnotherapeutic Approaches
•Establishing Your Client's Processing Style
Adapting Your Approach for Literal Processors
•Literal Thinkers
•Reframing Inductions
•Adapting Hypnotherapy Scripts for Literal Thinkers
•Using AI to Help Adapt Scripts
•Inductions for Literal Thinkers
•Ego Strengthening for Literal Thinkers
Adapting Your Approach for Non-Visual Processors
•Non-Visual Thinkers
•Reframing Inductions
•Adapting Hypnotherapy Scripts for Non-Visual Thinkers
•Using AI to Help Adapt Scripts
•Inductions for Non-Visual Thinkers
•Ego Strengthening for Non-Visual Thinkers
Adapting Your Approach for ADHD Clients or Attention Fluctuations
•ADHD or Attention Fluctuations
•Reframing Inductions
•Adapting Hypnotherapy Scripts for ADHD/Fluctuating Attention
•Using AI to Help Adapt Scripts
•Inductions for ADHD/Attention Fluctuations
•Ego Strengthening for ADHD/Attention Fluctuations
Adapting Your Approach for Clients with Strong Pattern & Detail Recognition
•Strong Pattern and Detail Recognition
•Reframing Inductions
•Adapting Hypnotherapy Scripts for Detailed and Pattern Thinkers
•Using AI to Help Adapt Scripts
•Inductions for Detailed and Pattern Thinkers
•Ego Strengthening for Detailed and Pattern Thinkers
Adapting Your Approach for Analytical Thinkers
•Analytical Processing Styles
•Reframing Inductions
•Adapting Hypnotherapy Scripts for Analytical Thinkers
•Using AI to Help Adapt Scripts
•Inductions for Analytical Thinkers
•Ego Strengthening for Analytical Thinkers
Positioning Yourself as a Neurodivergent Hypnotherapy Specialist
•Website Content
•Logo
•Personal Experience
•Marketing
3-Session Programme: Owning Your Neurodivergent Identity
•Overview
•Session 1: Foundations of Self-Acceptance and Validation
•Session 2: Releasing Shame and Reframing Past Experiences
•Session 3: Recognising Neurodivergent Skills & Integration
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
After you have attended the NDHypno® workshop you will receive access to an online portal with extensive materials, including video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, clear protocols, resources and practitioner guides. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion of the live workshop, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively work with neurodivergent clients.

 

Book Now          Contact us
 

Ref No: 2862
Diploma in CBT-hypnosis
Self-paced
GHR discount: £149 (standard fee: £299)
Course details:
CBT-Hypnosis combines the evidence-based principles of Cognitive Behavioural Therapy with the transformative potential of hypnosis, creating an approach that is both deeply engaging and highly effective. Rather than relying solely on discussion, worksheets and conscious reflection, CBT-Hypnosis brings the cognitive model to life through imagination, embodied experience and therapeutic hypnosis.
You'll learn how to work with the powerful relationship between thoughts, emotions, physical sensations and behaviours in a way that clients can genuinely experience, rather than simply understand. By incorporating safe, carefully guided imaginal exposure, mind-body techniques and hypnotic interventions, clients are able to rehearse new responses, strengthen emotional learning and develop lasting change at a deeper level.
While traditional CBT provides an outstanding framework, its structured format doesn't always resonate with every client or every learning style. CBT-Hypnosis preserves the very best of the cognitive behavioural model while offering a more experiential, flexible and intuitive way of applying it. The result is a modern, powerful therapeutic approach that opens up new possibilities for practitioners working across a wide range of presenting issues.
Course provider:
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning outcomes:
Learning Outcomes
By the end of this Diploma in CBT-Hypnosis, you will be able to:
•Understand the history and core principles of Cognitive Behavioural Therapy (CBT).
•Explain how hypnosis enhances and extends traditional CBT interventions.
•Understand imaginal exposure and the mind:body connection
•Understand the relationship between thoughts, emotions, behaviours and physical sensations.
•Recognise how learned behaviours develop and are maintained.
•Identify automatic thoughts and their impact on emotional wellbeing.
•Recognise common cognitive distortions and understand their role in psychological difficulties.
•Help clients identify, challenge and reframe unhelpful thinking patterns.
•Set effective therapeutic tasks to reinforce change between sessions.
•Deliver a structured CBT-Hypnosis protocol from assessment through to intervention.
•Apply the Miracle Question to facilitate solution-focused therapeutic change.
•Use the ABCDE model within a hypnotic framework.
•Deliver CBT-Hypnosis scripts safely and effectively.
•Incorporate NLP anchoring techniques to strengthen positive emotional states.
•Use submodality interventions to modify the emotional impact of thoughts and memories.
•Teach clients self-hypnosis techniques to promote independence and long-term change.
•Adapt CBT-Hypnosis techniques for clients who appear resistant, stuck or unable to engage with conventional approaches.
•Integrate cognitive, behavioural, hypnotic and experiential techniques into a cohesive therapeutic approach.
•Apply CBT-Hypnosis confidently across a wide range of common presenting issues.
•Work ethically, safely and within professional standards when using CBT-Hypnosis.
•Successfully complete the course assignments to demonstrate competence and gain certification.
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
After you have attended the Diploma in CBT-hypnosis workshop you will receive access to an online portal with extensive materials, including video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, clear protocols, resources and practitioner guides. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion of the live workshop, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively using CBT-hypnosis.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2863
NLP-hypnosis and Parts Therapy Practitioner Training
Self-paced
GHR discount: £149 (standard fee: £299)
Course details:
NLP-hypnosis and Parts Therapy Practitioner Training is a practical workshop that brings together two of the most effective approaches for helping clients resolve internal conflict and create lasting change.
Neuro-Linguistic Programming (NLP) offers a wealth of powerful therapeutic tools. Yet many practitioners can find themselves becoming overwhelmed by the terminology, models and language patterns, or wondering how to apply NLP naturally within real therapeutic conversations. This workshop strips away the complexity and focuses on the techniques that consistently make the greatest difference in practice.
Alongside this, you'll learn how Parts Therapy provides a compassionate framework for understanding the different aspects of ourselves that can appear to be in conflict. Rather than viewing ambivalence, self-sabotage or mixed emotions as obstacles, you'll discover how to work collaboratively with these parts to build understanding, integration and meaningful change.
Together, Parts Therapy and NLP complement one another beautifully. You'll learn straightforward, client-friendly interventions that can be integrated into hypnosis, coaching and psychotherapy, helping clients resolve internal conflicts, strengthen motivation and move forward with greater confidence, clarity and emotional alignment.
Course provider:
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning outcomes:
By the end of this NLP and Parts Therapy Workshop, you will be able to:
•Understand the foundations and development of Neuro-Linguistic Programming (NLP).
•Explain the core principles of NLP and how they apply to therapeutic practice.
•Understand how individuals construct their own subjective experience of the world.
•Describe the meaning of Neuro, Linguistic and Programming, and how these concepts influence behaviour and change.
•Recognise why NLP is an experiential, practical approach to personal and therapeutic development.
•Understand the principles of NLP modelling and how excellence can be identified and replicated.
•Apply the concept of cause and effect to support greater personal responsibility and client empowerment.
•Recognise that our internal representations are interpretations of reality rather than reality itself.
•Identify appropriate situations in which NLP techniques can be safely and effectively applied.
•Understand the origins of NLP and the contributions of pioneers including Fritz Perls, Virginia Satir and Milton Erickson.
•Recognise the differences between the Meta Model and the Milton Model and know when each is most appropriately used.
•Use Meta Model questioning to clarify language, challenge assumptions and gather richer information.
•Apply Milton Model language patterns to facilitate hypnotic communication and therapeutic change.
•Understand representational systems, modalities and submodalities, and their influence on thoughts, emotions and behaviour.
•Apply submodality interventions to modify emotional responses and strengthen desired experiences.
•Understand the therapeutic uses of associated and dissociated perspectives.
•Use a range of practical NLP techniques to facilitate cognitive and emotional change.
•Apply future pacing (pseudo-orientation in time) to reinforce therapeutic outcomes and increase confidence.
•Create and utilise NLP anchors to access and strengthen helpful emotional states.
•Understand the theory and practice of Parts Therapy within an NLP framework.
•Facilitate Parts Integration to help clients resolve internal conflict and increase congruence.
•Confidently integrate NLP and Parts Therapy techniques into hypnosis, coaching and therapeutic practice.
•Apply NLP ethically, safely and appropriately across a wide range of presenting issues.
•Successfully complete the course assignments to demonstrate competence and gain certification.
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
After you have attended the NLP-Hypnosis and Parts therapy workshop you will receive access to an online portal with extensive materials, including video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, clear protocols, resources and practitioner guides. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion of the live workshop, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively using NLP and parts therapy.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2861
Thrive Entrepreneur Practitioner Training
Self-paced
GHR discount £149 (standard fee £299)
Here are some amazing facts:
•Female entrepreneurs are more likely to be over 50.
•Women set up businesses not just because they want to be successful, but because they want flexibility for family and other responsibilities.
•Creativity and meaningfulness are often a driver for creating a business.
These research-based facts mean that female entrepreneurs establish businesses with a wealth of experience and a unique perspective.
But women also tend to face circumstances that make it hard to establish sustainable, fulfilling businesses.
These include:
•Imposter Syndrome
•Difficulties becoming visible
•Perfectionism
•Problems charging for services
•Issues around life: work boundaries
All of these - and other - issues can lead to women running businesses that are unsustainable and fail to provide them with the great lifestyle, freedom and flexibility that led them to set up the business in the first place.
Thrive Entrepreneur guides you through how to support your client AND it includes bonus materials - powerful hypnotherapy recordings and reflective guidance - to help you create the business you desire and deserve, as you overcome any of those problems commonly faced by women.
Course provider:
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Full course curriculum:
Thrive Entrepreneur Practitioner Curriculum
Module 1 – Introduction
•Welcome
•Meeting Growing Demand and Understanding the Unique Needs of Female Entrepreneurs
•Understanding Your Ideal Client
•Integrating Hypnotherapy, Coaching, NLP and Mindfulness
Module 2 – The Thrive Entrepreneur Framework
•The Four-Session Protocol
•Three Levels of Client Support
Module 3 – Understanding the Inner Critic
•The Role of the Inner Critic
•Imposter Syndrome
•Perfectionism
•Confidence and Self-Efficacy
Module 4 – Visibility and Being Seen
•Understanding Visibility
•Selling with Authenticity
•Managing Comparison
•Overcoming the Fear of Judgement
Module 5 – Worth and Success
•Redefining Success
•Money Beliefs and Self-Worth
•Healthy Boundaries
•Identity, Values and Success
Module 6 – Sustainable Entrepreneurship
•Creating a Sustainable Business
•Building Resilience
•Managing Uncertainty
•Preventing Burnout
•Developing a Long-Term Entrepreneurial Mindset
Module 7 – Pre-Session Preparation
•Client Assessment and Intake
•Using the Thrive Entrepreneur Resources
Module 8 – Session One
•Delivering Session One
•Practitioner Protocol
•Client Exercises
•Hypnosis Scripts
•Session Resources
Module 9 – Session Two
•Delivering Session Two
•Practitioner Protocol
•Client Exercises
•Hypnosis Scripts
•Session Resources
Module 10 – Session Three
•Delivering Session Three
•Practitioner Protocol
•Client Exercises
•Hypnosis Scripts
•Session Resources
Module 11 – Session Four
•Delivering Session Four
•Practitioner Protocol
•Client Exercises
•Hypnosis Scripts
•Session Resources
Module 12 – Continuing the Client Journey
•Planning Additional Sessions
•Extending the Thrive Entrepreneur Framework
•Ongoing Support and Premium Client Programmes
Module 13 – Building Your Thrive Entrepreneur Practice
•Positioning Yourself as a Thrive Entrepreneur Practitioner
•Pricing Your Programme
•Marketing to Female Entrepreneurs
•Creating Premium Packages and Long-Term Client Journeys
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
After you have attended the Thrive Entrepreneur workshop you will receive access to an online portal with extensive materials, including video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, clear protocols, resources and practitioner guides. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion of the live workshop, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively work with female entrepreneurs, and continue your own entrepreneurial journey.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2858
Men’s Resilience Toolkit: Hypnotherapy for Men Training
Self-paced
GHR discount £149 (standard fee £299)
Course details:
More men are seeking support than ever before, and they want something that feels purposeful, practical, and tailored to them. As a practitioner, this is a significant opportunity: a growing client base, an underserved niche, and a real need for skilled, confident professionals who understand how to work effectively with men.
The Men's Resilience Toolkit gives you exactly that.
This practitioner training is a structured, evidence-informed framework drawing on hypnotherapy, NLP, and coaching to deliver powerful, focused sessions for male clients. Rather than adapting general approaches and hoping they land, you'll have a toolkit built from the ground up around how men process experience, communicate, and respond to change.
Each element has been thoughtfully designed to feel purposeful and grounded, meeting male clients where they are and guiding them toward meaningful, lasting change. You'll understand the particular way men tend to engage with therapeutic and coaching work, and you'll know how to adapt your approach to bring out the best in every session. Whether you are new to working with male clients or looking to deepen and specialise your existing practice, this training offers a clear, confident path forward.
Join a growing community of practitioners bringing skilled, specialised support to male clients. Enrol today and add the Men's Resilience Toolkit to your professional practice.
Course provider:
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning outcomes:
Understanding Men's Mental Health:
• Overview
• The types of mental health issues men face
• Barriers to seeking help
• Current trends in seeking out therapy
• Is there a gender preference for therapists?
Making Therapy More Accessible for Male Clients:
• Overview
• Make it clear that you work with male clients
• Speaking a man's emotional language
• Entry points to therapy
Language Patterns:
• Overview
• Problem solving as an entry point
• Roles and responsibilities as a bridge
• Competition and challenge framing
• Work with anger as a primary emotion
• The body as a starting point
• Externalise the problem
• Anchor emotion in experience
• Use their own language back
• Reframe emotions as information, not weakness
• Normalise without minimising
• Metaphor and analogy
• Content free
Creating the Toolkit:
• Overview
• Anchoring and state management
• Cognitive reframing
• Emotional regulation
• Self-monitoring and maintenance
Men's Resilience Toolkit Protocol:
Pre-session contact
Session 1
Session 2
Session 3
Session 4
Additional sessions if required
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
After you have attended the Men’s Resilience Toolkit workshop you will receive access to an online portal with extensive materials, including video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, clear protocols, resources and practitioner guides. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion of the live workshop, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively work with male clients.

 

Book Now          Contact us
 

Ref No: 2856
Breathe Easy Smoking and Vaping Cessation

20 December 2026 Zoom
Self-paced version also available.
GHR discount: £129 (standard fee: £199)
Course details:
Become a Breathe Easy Practitioner and gain the skills to confidently and safely support clients on their journey to quit smoking and overcome vaping. This comprehensive training is designed for practitioners who want to help clients achieve lasting change—whether they’re stopping cigarettes, e-cigarettes, or both.
The course provides a clear, structured approach, combining effective hypnotherapy techniques with practical strategies for overcoming nicotine dependence. You’ll develop a solid understanding of the neuroscience of addiction, psychological triggers, and the real-world challenges clients face when quitting smoking or vaping.
Like other addictions, smokers remain trapped in powerful neuroscientific loops. Understanding the neuroscience of smoking and how hypnosis can help break the loops allows you to work confidently & effectively with your clients. Receive clear protocols and a guided programme to help your clients stop smoking. Bonus adaptive scripts and protocols are offered for the growing number of clients who wish to stop vaping. By the end of the program, you’ll be equipped with a safe, practical framework and ready-to-use materials to guide clients through each stage of the cessation process, empowering them to breathe easier and embrace a healthier, smoke-free life.
Course provider:
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning outcomes:
Welcome and Introduction
- Use of Logos and Titles
- Welcome!
- Learning Outcomes
- Copyright Statement
- Certification, Assignments and Course Navigation
Breathe Easy Programme Protocol
- Overview
- Pre-Session Preparation
- Single Session Structure
- Free Follow-up Session
Marketing
- Seasonal Campaigns
- Client Referral Programme
- Positioning the Breathe Easy Approach as a Premium Programme
- Logo
- Website Information
Research and References
- Research
- References
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
After you have attended the Breathe Easy workshop you will receive access to an online portal with extensive materials, including video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, clear protocols, resources and practitioner guides. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion of the live workshop, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively implement Breathe Easy in your practice.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2855
Diploma in Inner Child Hypnosis
Self-paced
GHR discount £75 (standard fee £95)
Course details:
There is often a great deal of unprocessed emotional experience stored within us from earlier life stages, and when those experiences remain unacknowledged, they can quietly shape our responses, relationships, and sense of self in the present.
Inner child hypnotherapy gently guides clients toward awareness of these earlier parts of themselves, creating a safe and supported space for connection and healing to take place. As clients develop this compassionate inner relationship, they also build powerful skills for self-regulation — learning to soothe, comfort, and resource themselves from within, in ways that continue to benefit them long after each session ends.
This approach can be used alongside a wide range of therapeutic goals and is particularly valuable for clients seeking to understand patterns in their emotional responses, strengthen their sense of identity, or move forward with greater confidence and self-compassion.
Course provider:
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning outcomes:
Welcome and Introduction
- Certification, Assignments and Course Navigation
- Welcome
- About Academy of the Inner Mind (AIM)
- Learning Outcomes
- Course Structure
- Copyright Disclaimer
What is Inner Child Therapy?
- Introducing the Inner Child
- Why Inner Child Work Matters
- How Childhood Shapes Us
- Recognising the Inner Child in Everyday Life
- Inner Child Work in the Wider Therapeutic Landscape
- The Science Behind Inner Child Work
Working Hypnotherapeutically with the Inner Child
- Why Hypnosis Works So Well for Inner Child Healing
- Preparing Clients and Setting Expectations
- The Potentials and Power of This Work
- Points to Consider: Scope, Ethics and Safety
- Inner Child Hypnosis Protocol
Rapport Building Before Meeting Your Client's Inner Child
- Evaluating Suitability of this Approach
Self Hypnosis
- Self Hypnosis
- Self Hypnosis Client Handout
Explaining the Inner Child Concept
- Preparing to Meet Your Inner Child
Making Links With Your Inner Child
- Creating Connections with Your Inner Child
Noticing the Inner Child
- Beginning to Pay Attention to Your Inner Child
Healing the Inner Child
- Re-parenting Your Child With Kindness, Acceptance & Boundaries
Emotional Processing
- Working Through the Emotional Stages
Accessing the Adult State
- Recognising and Accessing an Adult State
- Utilising an NLP Anchor
References
- References
Recordings scripts
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
After you have attended the Diploma in Inner Child Hypnosis workshop you will receive access to an online portal with extensive materials, including video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, clear protocols, resources and practitioner guides. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion of the live workshop, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively implement Inner Child Hypnosis in your practice.

 

Book Now          Contact us
 

Ref No: 2841
Hypno Weight Loss Jab Practitioner Training
Self-paced
GHR discount: £149 (standard fee: £299)
Are you ready to elevate your hypnotherapy practice with a cutting-edge program that meets the growing demand for weight loss solutions? Weight loss jabs continue to grow in popularity, but are not the right choice for many people, who are looking for safe, natural alternatives. The Hypno Weight Loss Jab Program is a revolutionary, up-to-date, and completely safe alternative to the increasingly popular weight loss injections—and it’s a game-changer for your business.
This innovative program combines hypnotherapy’s proven ability to reprogram the subconscious with a structured approach to appetite control. Unlike medications that can have side effects, the Hypno Weight Loss Jab Program empowers clients naturally and holistically. It focuses on the neurological changes that take place during weight loss and works with the mind:body response in a safe, clearly structured way, drawing from our learnings about the effectiveness of real-life weight loss medications.
During the live workshop, you’ll learn about the physical, neurological, emotional and psychological reasons that can cause people to struggle with alcohol. Understanding the neurological impact of drinking provides the basis for understanding the significant impact of having a structured, 30 day alcohol-free period. You’ll learn practical techniques, such as MI for clients with alcohol issues and applying a sensitively updated version of aversion therapy, rooted in mind:body awareness.
In addition, you’ll have access to extensive online materials, so that you can revisit the course whenever you wish to. Your online resources include videos, client forms, resources, handouts, scripts, marketing materials and Hypno Weight Loss Jab logo. You’ll have lifetime access to these materials so that you can revisit them as you gain confidence in this area.
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning outcomes:
• Welcome and Introduction
• Course overview
• What are weight loss injections?
• Limitations, side-effects and contraindications of weight loss injections.
• Cultural and personal values.
• Practical, logistical and financial implications.
• Factors that reduce the effectiveness of weight loss jabs.
• Advantages of hypnotherapy weight loss jabs.
• Working with the mind and body
• Understanding the neurological benefits of weight loss jabs
• Holistic benefits of hypno weight loss jabs.
• Pre-session contact and determining suitability.
• Contraindications for hypno weight loss jab treatment.
• Developing a protocol.
• Clear 4 session structure with protocols, adaptions, scripts and multi-modality approach
• Motivation and readiness.
• Ethical considerations.
• Positioning and marketing your business
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
The Hypno Weight Loss Jab Practitioner Training is structured to provide a flexible and comprehensive learning experience for hypnotherapists. Delivered through a combination of video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, resources and practitioner guides, the course is divided into clear, self-paced modules. These modules cover the foundation of the Hypno Weight Loss Jab Practitioner Training practical hypnosis techniques, client management strategies, and marketing your services. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively implement the Hypno Weight Loss Jab Practitioner Training approach in your practice.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2842
FLOW Hypnobirthing Practitioner Training
Self-paced
GHR discount: £149 (standard fee: £299)
Become a FLOW Hypnobirthing Practitioner and learn a modern, accessible, and beautifully simple approach to birth preparation that resonates with today’s parents — and supports you in building a practice that feels aligned, grounded, and effective.
At the centre of the method is FLOW:
Feeling, Love, Openness, Wisdom — four pillars that shape a somatic, intuitive framework for guiding clients into calm, confidence, and an empowered flow state during pregnancy and birth. Instead of complex theory or rigid scripts, FLOW gives you clear, adaptable tools you can use with any client, in any birth setting.
This training is designed for practitioners who want to offer birth preparation that is current, inclusive, and practical, while still deeply connected to the emotional and physiological foundations of birth. You’ll gain:
- A somatic, step‑by‑step teaching structure that supports parents with ease
- Optional partner‑focused sessions you can provide to enhance birth teamwork
- A rich library of recordings and client resources
- Guidance for working with clients who have experienced previous loss or who want to deepen the emotional elements
- Marketing support to help you grow your FLOW Hypnobirthing offering with confidence
FLOW Hypnobirthing blends simplicity, science, and heart — giving you a powerful framework to support birthing families and a training experience that elevates your practice.
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Welcome
• FLOW foundations: Feeling, Love, Openness and Wisdom
• What FLOW Hypnobirthing Is
• What FLOW Hypnobirthing Is Not
• Note on Language of Birth
• The Role of Birth Partners
• Note on Language and Gender
The Pregnancy to Birth Journey
• Overview
• Conception and fertilisation
• The first trimester
• The second trimester
• The third trimester
The Stages of Labour
• The Body Preparing
• Stage 1 – Labour Begins
• Stage 2 – The Birth of the Baby
• Stage 3 – Birthing the Placenta
• A process of opening
Evidence Based Approach
• What the research shows
The Complex Interplay of Birth Hormones
• Overview
• Supporting the release of oxytocin and endorphins
• The impact of imbalanced hormones
How Hypnosis Can Help
• Overview
• Helping our clients set realistic expectations
• Birth as a whole-person event
• How hypnosis supports the release of hormones
• Language
• Supporting clients to spend more time in the parasympathetic state
• Rapidly anchoring to the parasympathetic state
• Visualisation and future pacing
• Reframing unhelpful beliefs
• Releasing past trauma
• Ego-strengthening and advocacy
• Phobias
FLOW Protocol
• Overview
• Is FLOW a "natural birth" protocol?
• When to work with your clients
Pre-Session Contact
• Overview
• Website information
• Client intake
• Pre-session preparation
• Trifold leaflet
Resources
• Website information
• Website Q and A
• Feeling session exercises and scripts
• Love session exercises and scripts
• Openness session exercises and scripts
• Wisdom session exercises and scripts
• Tokophobia session script
• Partner shoulder anchor
• Partnered session materials
• Somatically responding to loss
FLOW Four Sessions
• Feeling
• Love
• Openness
• Wisdom
Additional Sessions
• Overview
• Tokophobia
• Pregnancy-related phobias
• Partner accompanied session
• Non-pregnancy related issues
• Ongoing support
• Responding to loss, miscarriage and stillbirth
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
After you have attended the FLOW Hypnobirthing workshop you will receive access to an online portal with extensive materials, including video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, clear protocols, resources and practitioner guides. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion of the live workshop, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively implement FLOW Hypnobirthing in your practice.

 

Book Now          Contact us
 

Ref No: 2840
Pain Rewired: Hypnotherapy for chronic pain course using the HEAL protocol
Self-paced
GHR discounted rate: £149 (standard rate: £299)
Chronic pain is a debilitating condition, which affects at least 25% of the adult population, with older adults and women being at a significantly higher risk for chronic pain conditions. Chronic pain is pain that is long-lasting – for at least a few months or longer – and it’s something that often becomes a condition that people live with for the duration of their lives.
Many chronic pain conditions don’t have a clear explanation, and it can be difficult for people to receive a diagnosis. Often, there are no effective treatment options, other than managing the condition with painkillers. And overuse of painkillers comes with risks, as well as the fact that they become less effective over time, in many cases.
For all of these reasons, there is a significant demand for hypnotherapy and other complementary treatments for chronic pain conditions and the HEAL protocol clearly demonstrates how to work effectively with your clients. Pain rewired: hypnotherapy for chronic pain training is a holistic approach to chronic pain that focuses on the person, not the condition. It includes powerful hypnotherapeutic pain management tools, creating a positive mind:body connection, and helping people make positive lifestyle choices. It also encourages a sense of release of past trauma and experiences that can trigger or exacerbate pain conditions.
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning outcomes:
Foundations of Pain Science:
- Overview
- Limitations of the Bio‑medical Model
- Psychosomatic Pain
- Maladaptive Behaviours
- Understanding Pain as an Output of the Brain
- Nociception
- Categories of Chronic Pain
- Nociplastic Pain
- The Neuromatrix of Pain
- Secondary Gains
Hypnotherapy for Chronic Pain:
- Overview
- Research Findings
- Language Around Chronic Pain
- Cell Communication Therapy
- HEAL Protocol Goal Setting
- Pain Relief Techniques
- Self‑hypnosis
- Calming the Nervous System
- Pattern Interruption & Neural Pathways
- Time Distortion
- Releasing Emotional Pain
- Empowerment and Agency
Chronic Pain Protocol:
- Focus of Sessions
- How Hypnotherapy Helps
- Client Disclaimer
- Pre‑session Intake
- Session 1 Protocol
- Session 2 Protocol
- Session 3 Protocol
- Session 4 Protocol
Marketing:
- Client Base
- Marketing Suggestions
Your course includes:
All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
After you have attended the Pain Rewired Training workshop you will receive access to an online portal with extensive materials, including video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, clear protocols, resources and practitioner guides. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion of the live workshop, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively implement Pain Rewired in your practice.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2826
Train the Trainer Course for Hypnotherapists
Date TBC
£3500
Online Live Zoom Training
Are you ready to take your hypnotherapy career to the next level? Our Train the Trainer course provides everything you need to establish an accredited training school with the GHR. You can expect to earn up to £3000 per student on a group course and up to £10,000 for 1-2-1 hypnotherapy training, making this an incredible way to take your career forwards. You don’t have to have a teaching background, just a passion for hypnotherapy and sharing your knowledge!
Training includes:
•3 days live online training
•Full accreditation guidance for setting up your training school
•All teaching materials, including PowerPoints, scripts, and client handouts
•A comprehensive course manual with usual copyright restrictions waived so that you can use course materials with your students
•A comprehensive school manual, including details of student support procedures etc
•Expert guidance and teaching from Dr. Claire Jack
•Guidance through the application process
•External marking and ongoing support for your students from Dr. Claire Jack
You should have at least 2 years’ experience as a hypnotherapist in order to meet training requirements. However, if you have slightly less than this, you can still attend the training and begin preparing to establish your school. You will have to wait until you have fulfilled the two year requirement to train your first cohort of students.
What we’ll cover
Day 1
•Welcome & introduction
You will have a chance to provide an overview of your course needs and your business vision.
•Course materials overview
You will be introduced to the Diploma in Clinical Hypnotherapy course materials for use with your students. If there are any topics which are less familiar to you we will leave time to cover these.
•Programme handbook
Most accrediting bodies require a comprehensive programme handbook and you will be given a template of a handbook which you can adapt.
•Accreditation process
I will guide you through the accreditation process (which we will go through together individually at a later date).
Day 2
•Online & in-person delivery
Accredited courses can be delivered via live zoom, or face-to-face training. We will look at the pros and cons of both delivery methods and how to ensure your preferred training format is successful and meets differing accreditation needs.
•Venue hire
If you choose to run a face-to-face course, we shall explore some of the considerations in choosing a suitable venue and using the space effectively.
•Interactive and supportive learning
We'll look at how to make the learning environment fun, practical and stimulating whilst meeting the needs of students with diverse needs.
•PowerPoints
We'll explore course PowerPoints, which you will receive as part of your affiliate package, and how you can deliver them effectively & confidently.
•Student needs & disputes
We will cover how to support students and how to deal with any disputes or complaints.
Day 3
•Marketing
In addition to benefiting from AIM's nationwide marketing, you will learn how to establish your own successful marketing strategy
•Student contact
Through role play, you'll learn how to confidently address student enquiries to ensure that potential students want to study with you
•Prospectus
You'll learn how to strike the right balance and clearly convey your mission statement, values and personality to attract the students who are right for your course.
•Online portal
An online portal is a great addition to your teaching resources. You will be guided through the processes of setting up your portal with practical demonstrations.
•Assignments & marking
You will learn how to set assignments and use materials provided by AIM. You will also be guided through the internal & external marking process.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2712
KidsMatters®: Children’s Hypnotherapy Training
Self-paced option also available
GHR discount 149 (standard fee £299)
Children today are growing up in a world that asks more of them than ever before. Anxiety, sleep issues, confidence struggles, emotional overwhelm, exam pressure, habits, and stress-related symptoms are increasingly common topics for families seeking support. As demand rises, practitioners are looking for a specialist skill set that goes beyond “adult techniques, adapted” — a child-centred approach that is developmentally appropriate, ethically sound, and genuinely engaging for young minds. Includes a module for working with Neurodivergent Children.
KidsMatters® is a leading voice in children’s hypnotherapy training, equipping qualified practitioners with the confidence and competence to work safely and effectively with children from around age 5 through to the teenage years. The training provides everything you need to deliver high-quality sessions — not only with children, but also in partnership with parents and caregivers, so change is supported at home as well as in the therapy room.
With a holistic, practical framework, KidsMatters® integrates hypnosis with complementary approaches including NLP, mindfulness, and age-appropriate CBT-hypnosis strategies. The result is a modern toolkit that respects children’s unique developmental stages, supports emotional regulation and resilience, and helps you create sessions that are both effective and enjoyable — for the child, the family, and you as the practitioner.
If you can’t attend the live workshop it’s not a problem – you’ll have access to the video recording of the workshop and client materials.
Learning outcomes:
Tailoring Your Approach to Children
•Working with Imaginative Flow
•How can Hypnotherapy Help Children?
•What Age Can You Work With Children
•Contraindications
Working With Neurodivergent Children
•What is Neurodivergence?
•An Overview of Neurodivergent Conditions
•Adapting your approach for neurodivergent children
•Meeting the Child's Needs
•Parental Expectations
•Discussing the Possibility of Neurodivergence
Team Working With Parents
•Establishing a Relationship with the Child & Parents
•Therapeutic Boundaries
•Team Working with Schools
Children, Ethics and the Law
•Overview
•Child Protection and Wellbeing
•Confidentiality
•National and Local Laws
•Professional Membership and Insurance
•Implied and Informed Consent
Fun and Games
•Benefits of Therapeutic Games
•Rapport Building
•Discussing Sensitive Issues
•Inner Resources and Solutions
•Explaining Hypnotherapy
•Encouraging Parental Child Interaction
•Drawing and NLP
Inductions
•Child Friendly Inductions
•Example Personalised Inductions
•Quick and Effective Inductions
•Naturalistic inductions
•How to Tell When a Child is Hypnotised
Child-friendly Hypnotic Language, Metaphors & Storytelling
•Hypnotic Language Considerations
•Metaphors and Storytelling
Solution Focused Approach
•The Miracle Question
•Scaling
•Goal Setting
Accessing Inner Resources
•NLP Anchor
•Secret Superhero
Cognitive Behavioural Therapy
•Thoughts, Emotions and Behaviours
•Distorted and Irrational Thinking
•ABCDE Approach
•Combining CBT with Hypnosis
•Tasks
Revisiting Trauma and Letting Go
•Revisiting Trauma
•Letting Go
•Submodalities
Mindfulness
•What is Mindfulness?
•Adapting mindfulness for children
•Emotional Regulation
Self-hypnosis
•Teaching Self-hypnosis
Detailed guidance and protocols for treating:
•Self-esteem and Self-confidence
•Self-confidence
•Self-destructive Behaviour
•Bullying
•Bedwetting
•Anxiety
•"Picky Eating"
•Phobias
•Exam Nerves
•Thumb Sucking and Other Habits
•Concentration Issues
•Chronic Pain
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
The KidsMatters® Children’s Hypnotherapy Training is structured to provide a flexible and comprehensive learning experience for hypnotherapists. Delivered through a combination of video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, resources and practitioner guides, the course is divided into clear, self-paced modules. These modules cover the foundation of the KidsMatters® practical hypnosis techniques, client management strategies, and marketing your services. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively implement KidsMatters® protocols in your practice.
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy of the Inner Mind blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, our courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with children. You’ll also receive a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2762
The Phobia Fix: Hypnotherapy Training for Phobias
GHR discount £149 (standard price £299)

Self-paced
Are you ready to elevate your hypnotherapy practice with a science-backed program that meets the growing demand for rapid and effective phobia treatment? The Phobia Fix is a revolutionary, structured, and results-driven approach designed to rewire the fear response at the neurological level—and it’s a game-changer for your business.
This innovative program brings the latest neuroscience of phobias centre stage, combining CBT, imaginal exposure, NLP anchoring, parts therapy, and the exclusive Hypno Beta Blocker (HypnoBB®) technique to help clients break free from their fears—often in just one session. Unlike outdated or drawn-out methods, The Phobia Fix offers a clear, structured approach that delivers fast, lasting change while keeping your clients feeling empowered and in control.
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning objectives:
Introduction to The Phobia Fix
•Welcome to The Phobia Fix
•Why The Phobia Fix is Different
•What's Covered in The Phobia Fix
•Who Is Likely to Seek Phobia Treatment?
•Copyright
Understanding Phobias
•What is a Phobia?
•Specific Phobias
•Understanding the Causes of Specific Phobias
•Secondary Gain and Phobias
•Neuroscience of Phobias
How Science Shapes The Phobia Fix
•Overview: The Science Behind The Phobia Fix
•Research on Exposure Therapy for Phobias and the Role of Imaginal Exposure
•Neuroscience Meets Hypnosis: The Beta Blocker Approach
•CBT-Hypnosis
•NLP Anchoring
•The Fast Phobia and Rewind Techniques
•Retraumatisation vs. Re-experiencing
•Real-Life Exposure to the Phobia
The Phobia Fix Protocol: Primary Session
•A Single-Session Solution
•Session 1 Steps
•Pre-Session Preparation
•Creating a Safe Place
•CBT - ABCDE Interview
•Creating an Anchor
•The Phobia Reset: CBT-Hypnosis with Hypno Beta Blocker
•The Phobia Reset Recording
•Real-Life Exposure
The Phobia Fix Protocol: Follow-Up Session
•When a Follow-Up Might Be Needed
•Session 2 Steps
•Checking-In from the Previous Session
•Parts Therapy
•Fast Phobia Technique and Unconscious Reintegration
Additional Sessions
•Overview
•What to Focus on in Further Sessions
•Changing Direction
•Signposting Clients
Marketing & Business Growth
•Targeting the Right Clients
•Website Information
•Social Media Strategy & Creating a Marketing Calendar
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
The Phobia Fix Practitioner Training is designed to provide hypnotherapists with a flexible, comprehensive learning experience in effective phobia treatment. Delivered through a live, interactive, live workshop and with permanent access to combination of video lectures, client demonstrations, and downloadable resources, including scripts, practitioner guides, and session frameworks, the course is structured into clear, self-paced modules.
These modules cover the neuroscience of phobias, the structured Phobia Fix Protocol, and practical hypnosis techniques such as CBT integration, imaginal exposure, NLP anchoring, parts therapy, and the exclusive HypnoBB® (which hypnotically mimics the effect of a beta blocker, which research shows can significantly alter someone’s experience of phobias). You’ll also gain insights into client management strategies and marketing your services to attract more clients seeking phobia resolution.
With lifetime access to course materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion, this training ensures you have the knowledge, confidence, and tools to successfully implement The Phobia Fix in your practice.
 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2714
HypnoMenopause® Practitioner Training

Self-paced
GHR discounted rate: £149 (standard rate: £299)
In clinical trials, hypnotherapy has been shown to reduce hot flushes by as much as 74%. HypnoMenopause® provides a complementary and alternative, evidence based approach for women who are experiencing menopausal symptoms. Menopause is an increasingly in-demand area and HypnoMenopause® is the only course which allows you to call yourself a HypnoMenopause® Practitioner.
You will receive extensive online materials, including client demonstrations, PowerPoints, course manual, client resources and scripts - everything you need to work with menopausal clients. You are required to work through the online self-paced course, including showing that you have watched videos and PowerPoints, to receive your certificate. Upon completion of the course, you will receive a CPD Certificate for 15 hours and your HypnoMenopause® logo for use on marketing materials. There are optional case studies which you are welcome to submit for feedback, if you wish.
Learning outcomes
During this course you will learn about:
What menopause is
Hormonal changes
Vasomotor symptoms
Menopause as a social and cultural construction
Premature and induced menopause
The impact of menopausal symptoms
What HRT is
Combining hypnotherapy with HRT
How psychological therapies can help women during menopause
How hypnotherapy can help women during menopause
Clinical research findings
Client intake
Using client history
Referring clients on
Working with other healthcare professionals
Solution focused approach
CBT and reframing
Metaphorical approach
Mindfulness
Adopting an integrated hypnotherapeutic approach
Working with the HypnoMenopause® Protocol

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2737
Hypno Weight Loss Jab Practitioner Training
Self-paced alternative version is also available if you cannot make the live training.
GHR discount £149 (standard fee £299)
Are you ready to elevate your hypnotherapy practice with a cutting-edge program that meets the growing demand for weight loss solutions? Weight loss jabs continue to grow in popularity, but are not the right choice for many people, who are looking for safe, natural alternatives. The Hypno Weight Loss Jab Program is a revolutionary, up-to-date, and completely safe alternative to the increasingly popular weight loss injections—and it’s a game-changer for your business.
This innovative program combines hypnotherapy’s proven ability to reprogram the subconscious with a structured approach to appetite control. Unlike medications that can have side effects, the Hypno Weight Loss Jab Program empowers clients naturally and holistically. It focuses on the neurological changes that take place during weight loss and works with the mind:body response in a safe, clearly structured way, drawing from our learnings about the effectiveness of real-life weight loss medications.
Course structure:
You’ll learn how and why the Hypno Weight Loss Jab “mimics” the effects of the medical jab, and helps people deepen their connection with their body, helping to override the effects of “food noise”. You’ll also learn a comprehensive approach to administering the jab under hypnosis and teaching your clients to regularly administer their own hypnosis injections, creating a clear structure for self-hypnosis and helping the formation of new habits.
You’ll have access to extensive online materials, so that you can revisit the course whenever you wish to. Your online resources include videos, client forms, resources, handouts, scripts, marketing materials and Hypno Weight Loss Jab logo. You’ll have lifetime access to these materials so that you can revisit them as you gain confidence in this area.
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning outcomes:
•Welcome and Introduction
•Course overview
•What are weight loss injections?
•Limitations, side-effects and contraindications of weight loss injections.
•Cultural and personal values.
•Practical, logistical and financial implications.
•Factors that reduce the effectiveness of weight loss jabs.
•Advantages of hypnotherapy weight loss jabs.
•Working with the mind and body
•Understanding the neurological benefits of weight loss jabs
•Holistic benefits of hypno weight loss jabs.
•Pre-session contact and determining suitability.
•Contraindications for hypno weight loss jab treatment.
•Developing a protocol.
•Clear 4 session structure with protocols, adaptions, scripts and multi-modality approach
•Motivation and readiness.
•Ethical considerations.
•Positioning and marketing your business
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
The Hypno Weight Loss Jab Practitioner Training is structured to provide a flexible and comprehensive learning experience for hypnotherapists. Delivered through a combination of video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, resources and practitioner guides, the course is divided into clear, self-paced modules. These modules cover the foundation of the Hypno Weight Loss Jab Practitioner Training practical hypnosis techniques, client management strategies, and marketing your services. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively implement the Hypno Weight Loss Jab Practitioner Training approach in your practice.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2820
HypnoSober Practitioner Training
13 December 2026 Live zoom workshop

Self-paced version also available
GHR discount £149 (standard cost £299)
Cultural attitudes towards alcohol are shifting. More people than ever—especially at the start of a new year—are choosing to explore sobriety, whether through campaigns like Dry January, Stoptober, Dry July, or as part of the growing “Sober Curious” movement.
Yet many practitioners hesitate to work with clients around alcohol, unsure about their professional boundaries or how to approach the topic safely and effectively. HypnoSober is here to bridge that gap.
This live workshop offers a structured, evidence-based approach for hypnotherapists who want to confidently support clients seeking 30 days of sobriety. The HypnoSober framework integrates hypnosis with practical tools from Cognitive Behavioural Therapy (CBT), Dialectical Behaviour Therapy (DBT), Motivational Interviewing, and mindfulness. You’ll also learn how to apply a modern, mind-body-based version of aversion therapy—providing clients with a comprehensive, compassionate toolkit for change. You’ll receive clear guidelines about how to work with a client through four sessions, covering their initial 30 days, and guidance on how to support them following their initial HypnoSober programme.
HypnoSober aligns seamlessly with public health campaigns but also stands independently for clients who identify as Sober Curious and want a clear, supported pathway. Please note: this program is not intended for individuals with serious alcohol dependence or complex addiction needs, but is ideal for those seeking a guided, professional approach to 30 days of sobriety.
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning outcomes:
Module 1: Understanding Your Client
•Who This Programme Is For
•Who This Programme Is Not For
•The Neuroscience of Drinking
Module 2: The Importance of a Sober Break
•Why “Cutting Down” Rarely Works
•Responding to Clients Who Want to “Cut Down”
•Physical Reset
•Neurological Reset
•Psychological Reset
•Emotional Reset
Module 3: Hypnotherapy & Other Therapeutic Research
•Overview
•Evidence-Based Hypnotherapeutic Approaches
•Evidence-Based Wider Therapeutic Approaches
Module 4: Client Assessment Framework
•Overview
•Screening Questions and Intake Forms
•AUDIT-C Questionnaire
•Informed Consent and Scope of Practice
•Practitioner Self-Care
Module 5: The 30 Day Structure
•Pre-Session Preparation
•Overview
•Session 1 Protocol
•Session 2 Protocol
•Session 3 Protocol
•Session 4 Protocol
•Follow-Up Support
•Journalling
•Providing a Support Group
Dealing with Difficulties
•When Clients Turn Up Under the Influence of Alcohol
•Relapses During the 30 Days
•Relapses Following the End of Your Sessions
•Clients Who “Move the Goal Posts” During Their 30 Days
Beyond the 30 Days
•Options After 30 Days
•Relapse Prevention
•When Clients Cannot Moderate
Business and Marketing
•Positioning Your Service
•Linking with Seasonal Campaigns
•Package Options and Pricing Strategies
•Providing an Accompanying Support Group
•Use of logo
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
The HypnoSober Practitioner Training is structured to provide a flexible and comprehensive learning experience for hypnotherapists. Delivered through a combination of video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, resources and practitioner guides, the course is divided into clear, self-paced modules. These modules cover the foundation of the HypnoSober practical hypnosis techniques, client management strategies, and marketing your services. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively implement the HypnoSober approach in your practice.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2791
HypnoSomnia: Hypnotherapy Training for Sleep Issues
Online self-paced course
GHR discount £149 (standard fee £299)
Are you ready to help clients overcome one of the most common yet debilitating challenges they face? Sleep difficulties affect millions, and there are many different reasons why people can't sleep – from racing thoughts and physical tension to trauma responses, hormonal changes, chronic pain, sleep phase disorders, and deeply ingrained patterns of hypervigilance. HypnoSomnia equips you with specialized skills to address this wide spectrum of sleep disorders, insomnia, and sleep-related challenges through evidence-based hypnotherapeutic techniques.
Course structure:
HypnoSomnia Practitioner Course is structured to provide a flexible and comprehensive learning experience for hypnotherapists. You’ll have a choice of attending a live workshop, or accessing a self-paced online course. This is delivered through a combination of video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, resources and practitioner guides, the course is divided into clear, self-paced modules. These modules cover the foundation of the HypnoSomnia Practitioner Course, client management strategies, and marketing your services. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively return to the materials as you work with your clients.
What You'll Learn:
Core Sleep Science & Psychology
• Understanding sleep cycles, circadian rhythms, and sleep architecture
• Identifying underlying causes of sleep disturbances
• Recognizing the connection between stress, anxiety, and sleep quality
Specialized Hypnotherapy Techniques
• Sleep tools and practical interventions for immediate relief
• Psychoeducation approaches to help clients understand their sleep patterns
• Directed dreaming techniques for therapeutic sleep experiences
• Controlled dissociation methods for releasing bedtime hypervigilance
• CBT restructuring integrated with hypnotic states
• Cognitive restructuring for racing thoughts and bedtime anxiety
• Somatic approaches to release physical tension and hypervigilance
• Advanced visualization techniques for creating optimal sleep environments
Client-Centred Protocols
• Comprehensive intake processes for sleep-related issues
• Tailored session structures for different sleep challenges
• Home practice recordings and sleep hygiene integration
• Follow-up strategies to maintain long-term sleep improvements
Who This Training Serves
• Qualified hypnotherapists seeking specialization in sleep therapy
• Healthcare professionals wanting to integrate hypnotic techniques
• Therapists and coaches looking to expand their toolkit for anxious clients
• Practitioners who want to offer high-value, in-demand services
Complete Module Structure
Welcome and Introduction
• Certification, Assignments and Course Navigation
• Welcome to HypnoSomnia: Mastering the Art of Sleep Hypnosis
• Course Modules and Structure: What to Expect
• About Academy of the Inner Mind
Understanding Sleep
• Overview
• Circadian Rhythms
• Types of Sleep Disorder
• Checking Physical Causes
• What is Insomnia?
Managing Client Expectations
• Your "Average" Client
• Managing Client Expectations
Clean Sleep and Practical Measures
• Overview
• Discussing Clean Sleep with Your Clients
• Napping
Hypnotherapeutic Approaches to Sleep
• What the Research Shows
• Hypnotherapeutic Approaches That Help
• Progressive Muscle Relaxation
• Cognitive Restructuring Under Hypnosis
• Metaphorical Storytelling
• Imagery Rehearsal Therapy for Nightmares
• Hypnotic Suggestions for Sleep Continuity & Depth
• Circadian Rhythm Adaptation Techniques
• Mindfulness-Based Sleep Approaches
• Breaking the Sleep: Pain Cycle
• Lucid Dreaming
• Self-hypnosis
• Post-hypnotic Suggestion
• Establishing a Safe Place
• Recordings
Marketing and Business Development
• Website Information
• Logo
• Spreading the Word
Includes extensive practitioner scripts and resources and client resources and handouts.
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programmes are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Your course includes: HypnoSomnia logo, client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2781
HypnoFertility Practitioner Training

Self-paced

GHR discounted rate: £149 (standard rate: £299)
Course details:
Fertility issues affect millions of individuals and couples worldwide, and increasingly, they're seeking alternatives that address the whole person – not just the physical symptoms. Hypnosis has a clinically proven track record in significantly increasing women's chances of conception. This evidence-based programme draws on various hypnotherapeutic approaches, giving you the expertise to make a real difference. You'll master specialist topics including how to support women through managing stress and past trauma, the emotional complexities of IVF and you’ll develop skills to work effectively with both couples and individuals navigating their fertility journey. You’ll have a choice of working through the materials at your own pace to receive certification and gain access to logos and marketing materials that establish your expertise. Or, for deeper engagement, you can submit assignments for personalised marking and detailed feedback. Support is available from Dr. Claire Jack as you complete your learning, ensuring you feel confident and prepared to help clients achieve their dreams of parenthood.
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning outcomes:
Welcome & Introduction
•Understand certification requirements, assignments and course navigation
•Familiarize yourself with the author's background and expertise
•Learn appropriate terminology for fertility hypnotherapy
•Identify target audience for HypnoFertility services
Evidence Based Approach
•Comprehend the relationship between stress, hormones and mental health
•Analyse research findings supporting hypnotherapy for fertility
Fertility and Hormones
•Understand overview of fertility and hormones
•Identify female fertility hormones and their functions
•Recognize male fertility hormones and their impact
What Are Fertility Issues?
•Understand overview of fertility issues
•Identify common reasons for female fertility issues
•Recognize common reasons for male fertility issues
•Understand idiopathic or unexplained infertility
•Assess age-related fertility factors
Why do People Seek out HypnoFertility?
•Understand overview of client motivations
•Identify specific reasons clients choose HypnoFertility approaches
Managing Client Expectations
•Understand overview of expectation management
•Address stress, pressure and goal-setting with clients
•Master techniques for reframing client expectations
•Guide clients in setting specific intentions
•Implement effective time management strategies
HypnoFertility Pre-session Protocol
•Understand overview of pre-session protocols
•Develop client information resources
•Conduct effective initial calls or contact (Step 1)
•Implement information gathering and preparation procedures (Step 2)
•Apply appropriate disclaimers (Step 3)
•Utilize pre-session recordings effectively
Hypnotherapeutic Approaches to Fertility
•Apply psychoeducation principles
•Guide clients in setting therapeutic intentions
•Prepare clients for medical interventions
•Implement stress management techniques
•Reframe unhelpful beliefs and thought patterns
•Utilize clean language techniques
•Apply metaphorical storytelling in sessions
•Understand and work with the mind-body connection
•Facilitate somatic release techniques
•Create and use effective affirmations
•Support clients dealing with grief and loss
•Help clients reconnect with their reproductive self
•Provide lifestyle and habit support
•Apply NLP techniques in fertility contexts
•Conduct partnered hypnotherapy sessions
Session Protocol
•Design and deliver Session 1
•Plan and execute Session 2
•Implement Session 3 protocols
•Conduct Session 4 effectively
•Facilitate Session 5 successfully
•Conduct partnered hypnotherapy sessions
Marketing Resources
•Understand how to use marketing materials effectively
•Utilize business cards for professional networking
•Implement trifold leaflets for client education
•Use A4 flyers for promotional purposes
•Apply logo consistently across materials
•Implement website Q&As for client information
Client Resources
•Understand next steps for client progression
•Implement comprehensive client intake forms
•Apply appropriate disclaimer forms
•Guide clients through softening breath techniques
•Teach self-hypnosis instructions
•Facilitate "Here, Now, Safe" mindfulness exercises
•Use the Fertility Wheel of Balance assessment tool
Scripts & Therapist Resources
•Apply supportive intention-setting techniques
•Utilize therapeutic affirmations effectively
•Ask emotionally supportive questions
•Implement Recording 1 Script for preparation for hypnotherapy
•Use Recording 2 Script as a companion for fertility journey
•Apply Recording 3 Script for moving forward
•Guide softening breath using practitioner guide
•Teach self-hypnosis using practitioner guide
•Facilitate mindfulness exercises using practitioner guide
•Apply the Reframe Method effectively
•Use solution-focused questions for Session 2
•Implement Session 2 Script
•Apply reflective questions for Session 3
•Use practitioner guide for Fertility Wheel of Balance
•Ask appropriate questions for Session 4
•Conduct questions for the final/review session
•Integrate the Carried Object technique
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
The HypnoFertility Practitioner Training is structured to provide a flexible and comprehensive learning experience for hypnotherapists. Delivered through a combination of video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, resources and practitioner guides, the course is divided into clear, self-paced modules. These modules cover the foundation of the HypnoFertility practical hypnosis techniques, client management strategies, and marketing your services. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively implement the HypnoFertility approach in your practice.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2772
NeuroMood Hypnotherapy
GHR discount £149 (standard fee £299)
Self-Paced Online
Course Details:
NeuroMood - Hypnotherapy and the brain’s path to emotional balance.
NeuroMood is a new course for hypnotherapists who want to work safely and ethically with clients experiencing low mood and mild depression. Without additional mental health training, we often worry about treating clients experiencing low mood. Yet hypnotherapy can help clients in ways that are unavailable through talking therapy alone, given that low mood and mild depression are such physical experiences for many people. Working safely should always be our first priority, and this course guides you through using forms such as the PHQ-9 and specifically designed intake forms so that you feel confident in working with a client or signposting them according to their needs.
This advanced practitioner training explores the neuroscience behind low mood and depression and combines CBT-hypnosis, mind body work, NLP and mindfulness to create an approach that gently helps your client set workable intentions and work towards those intentions whilst allowing their mind and body to heal. It acknowledges the physical experience of low mood and depression and focuses on creating a sense of emotional balance and harmony. As you learn how to help your clients build new neural pathways, you'll also develop the skills to help them bring self-compassion and acceptance, which is essential when so many clients with low mood experience self-judgement and guilt. Hypnotherapy has a proven track record in helping clients with low mood and depression
Designed for hypnotherapists, coaches, and healthcare professionals looking to integrate a mind-body approach to low mood and mild depression, this training will empower you to transform lives through the power of hypnosis.
Welcome and Introduction:
•Certification, Assignments and Course Navigation
•Welcome
•Copyright Disclaimer
Understanding the Brain in Mood Work:
•Overview
•The Neuroscience of Mood: Neurotransmitters
•The Neuroscience of Mood: Key Brain Structures
•Low Mood and Depression are Physical, Too
•Depression as a Way of Seeing
•Why This Matters in Hypnotherapy
Working Safely and Ethically With Clients:
•Overview
•Dealing With Different Levels of Depression
•How to Sensitively Signpost Clients
•Dealing with Crisis Situations
•The Importance of a Pre-Session Questionnaire
•PHQ-9 Screening Tool
Why People Develop Depression:
•Overview
•Biology and Brain Chemistry
•Psychological Patterns and Learned Responses
•Understanding Genetics and Epigenetics in Depression
•Hormonal and Medical Contributors to Depression
Hypnotherapy For Depression:
•What the Research Says
•Explaining How Hypnotherapy Can Help with Low Mood
•Psychoeducation
•Integrating Understanding Into Therapeutic Practice
•Practicalities of Working with Clients with Low Mood
•Setting Intentions with Ease
•Metaphorical Storytelling
•Creating a Safe Place
•The Therapeutic Value of Hypnotic Recordings
•How CBT-Hypnosis Can Help with Low Mood or Depression
•Mindfulness in Therapeutic Work
•Experiencing the Mind:Body Connection
NeuroMood Protocol:
•Overview
•Pre-session Contact
•Session 1
•Session 2
•Session 3
•Session 4
Research and Supporting Literature:
•References
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Your course includes: NeuroMood logo, client scripts, optional assignment and marking, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
The NeuroMood Course is structured to provide a flexible and comprehensive learning experience for hypnotherapists. Delivered through a combination of video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, resources and practitioner guides, the course is divided into clear, self-paced modules. These modules cover the foundation of the NeuroMood Course, client management strategies, and marketing your services. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively implement intuitive coaching.
 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2764
Diploma in Intuitive Coaching
Online self-paced course
GHR Discount £47 (standard price £349)
Course details:
Your intuition is your greatest tool—learn how to harness it to empower others and create real, lasting change. The Diploma in Intuitive Life Coaching blends practical coaching techniques with deep intuitive insight, giving you the skills to guide clients toward clarity, confidence, and transformation.
This course is perfect for hypnotherapists who want to incorporate life coaching into their practice in a way that is authentic, impactful, and deeply connected. Whether you’re looking to start a new career or enhance your existing practice, this diploma will give you the confidence and expertise to help clients break through blocks, align with their purpose, and take inspired action.
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning outcomes
Module 1: Being an Intuitive Life Coach
•Welcome and Course Overview
•Course Modules Overview
•What is Life Coaching?
•Coaching vs. Counselling – Understanding the Difference
•What Sets Intuitive Life Coaching Apart?
•What Makes a Good Life Coach?
•What Will Make You a Great Life Coach?
•Understanding the Coaching Relationship
•Creating a Professional Environment
•Creating Healthy Boundaries
•Providing a Supportive Yet Challenging Environment
•Reflections on Module 1
Module 2: Developing & Harnessing Your Intuition
•What is Intuition?
•Developing Your Intuition
•Bringing Intuition Into Your Coaching Sessions
•Harnessing Your Intuition for Effective Coaching
•The Intuitive Coaching Relationship
•Reflections on Module 2
Module 3: Intuitive Values
•Exploring Values in Life Coaching
•Cultural vs. Personal Values
•Exploring a "Deep-Felt" Sense of Values
•Reflections on Module 3
Module 4: Tools and Strategies
•Overview of Coaching Tools
•Establishing the Coaching Relationship
•Open Questions & Clean Language
•Solution-Focused Questions
•Intuitive Questions
•The Intuitive Wheel of Life
•The Intuitive GROW Model
•Body Compass
•Meeting Your Inner Wisdom
•Emotions Mandala
•Becoming More Authentic
•Emotional Balance
•Guided Animal Play Meditation
•Your Secret Superhero
•Creating Your Affirmation
•Intuitive Parts Integration
•Harmony and Alignment
•Reflections on Module 4
Module 5: Delivering Your Sessions
•Creating a Coaching Programme
•Pre-Session Preparation
•Session 1: Intuitive Goal Setting
•Session 2: Deepening Intuition and Inner Wisdom
•Session 3: Emotional Balance and Authenticity
•Session 4: Creativity, Play, and Joy
•Session 5: Integrating and Trusting the Intuitive Self
Module 6: Marketing Your Coaching Practice
•Identifying Your Unique Selling Point (USP)
•Specialising in a Niche Area
•Using Social Media for Visibility and Engagement
•Creating an Effective Coaching Website
•Networking, Talks & Public Speaking
Client Resources & Templates
•Life Coaching Contract & Confidentiality Agreement
•Client Intake Form
•Intuitive Values Handout & Guides
•Examples of Intuitive & Solution-Focused Questions
•Intuitive Wheel of Life & GROW Model Client Resource
•Guided Meditations: Meeting Inner Wisdom & Living with Wisdom
•Body Compass & Emotions Mandala
•Harmony & Alignment, Embracing Creativity Handout
•Guided Emotional Balance & Animal Play Visualizations
•Secret Superhero Exercise & Creating Your Affirmation
•Intuitive Parts Integration & Authenticity Map
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
The Diploma in Intuitive Life Coaching is structured to provide a flexible and comprehensive learning experience for hypnotherapists. Delivered through a combination of video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, resources and practitioner guides, the course is divided into clear, self-paced modules. These modules cover the foundation of the Diploma in Intuitive Life Coaching, client management strategies, and marketing your services. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively implement intuitive coaching

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2757
HypnoIBS® Practitioner Training
Self-paced
GHR discount £149 (standard fee £299)
Course details:
Are you a therapist looking to expand your toolkit with a proven, effective solution for IBS? HypnoIBS® offers a unique, evidence-based training program in gut-directed hypnotherapy, empowering you to help clients manage IBS symptoms with confidence.
Rooted in clinical research and backed by a holistic mind-body approach, HypnoIBS® combines science, compassion, and practical techniques. You’ll learn how to guide clients toward reducing pain, calming their gut, and breaking the stress-symptom cycle—naturally and effectively.
This training isn’t just about skill-building—it’s about transforming lives, including your own. Gain expertise, grow your practice, and stand out as a practitioner offering proven, results-driven hypnotherapy for gut health.
Become a qualified HypnoIBS® Practitioner – only students who have undertaken the training programme are entitled to use call themselves HypnoIBS® Practitioners – and offer your client the best in gut-directed hypnotherapy.
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning outcomes
•Welcome and Introduction
•Learning Outcomes
•Course Structure
•What is Irritable Bowel Syndrome?
•What Causes IBS?
•IBS Treatment Options
•The Gut-Brain Axis
•The Vagus Nerve
•HypnoIBS® Approach
•Hypnosis Research Findings
•HypnoIBS® Protocol
•Education and FODMAP
•Gut-directed Hypnosis
•NLP Anchor
•CBT-Hypnotherapy
•Emotional Release
•Mindfulness
•Pre-Session Contact
•Session 1 outline
•Session 2 outline
•Session 3 outline
•Scripts
•IBS Handouts
•Recordings
•HypnoIBS logo
•Website content
•Q and A for website
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
HypnoIBS® Practitioner Training is structured to provide a flexible and comprehensive learning experience for hypnotherapists. Delivered through a combination of video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, resources and practitioner guides, the course is divided into clear, self-paced modules. These modules cover the foundation of the HypnoIBS® Practitioner Training, client management strategies, and marketing your services. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively implement HypnoIBS® in your practice.
 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2735
VirtueBand® Practitioner Training
Online self-paced course
GHR Discount £149 (standard price £299)
Course details:
Training as a VirtueBand® Hypnosis Gastric Band Practitioner allows you to offer a deeply holistic and transformative approach to therapeutic care. Rooted in the four core virtues—self-compassion, bodily gratitude, patience, and holistic integration—VirtueBand® goes far beyond being just a virtual gastric band. It empowers clients to create lasting change by aligning their subconscious beliefs with these virtues, addressing challenges like emotional eating, stress, and self-confidence. As a certified practitioner, you’ll position yourself as an expert in this highly effective method, expand your client base, and elevate your career while helping clients achieve meaningful and sustainable growth in all aspects of their lives.
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning outcomes:
•Welcome and introduction
•Learning outcomes
•Course structure
•How gastric bands work
•Drawbacks, disadvantages and contraindications of physical gastric bands
•What is a Virtual Gastric Band?
•Does a Virtual Gastric Band suit your client?
•Preparation and client care
•VirtueBand® overview – more than a virtual gastric band
•The four “virtues” – self compassion, bodily gratitude, patience & holistic integration
•Session 1 Protocol overview
•Self-compassion and weight loss
•Revisiting and personalising the client’s goals
•Discussing dietary requirements
•Session 2 Protocol overview
•Lifestyle and dietary check-in
•Introducing the concept of bodily gratitude
•Fitting the VirtueBand®
•Using scent and sound to enhance the fitting of the band
•Creating a client recording
•Session 3 Protocol overview
•Adjusting the band
•The role of patience in sustainable and manageable weight loss
•Preparing your client for their final session
•Session 4 Protocol overview
•Reviewing their progress
•Reassessing the band’s effectiveness and readjusting if required
•The importance of holistic integration and weight loss goals
•Supporting your client in the future
•Marketing and fees
•Specialisation in weight loss
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
The VirtueBand® Virtual Gastric Band Practitioner Training is structured to provide a flexible and comprehensive learning experience for hypnotherapists. Delivered through a combination of video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, resources and practitioner guides, the course is divided into clear, self-paced modules. These modules cover the foundation of the VirtueBand® practical hypnosis techniques, client management strategies, and marketing your services. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively implement the VirtueBand® Protocol in your practice.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2736
Diploma in Hypnotherapy for Holistic Weight Loss
Online self-paced course
GHR Discount £149 (standard price £299)
Course details:
Are you ready to guide clients toward lasting change? Our Diploma in Hypnotherapy for Holistic Weight Loss empowers you with the tools and techniques to address the mind-body connection, helping clients break free from emotional eating, self-sabotage, and limiting beliefs. This comprehensive course explores the root causes of weight struggles and shows you how to harness the power of the subconscious mind to create sustainable results. By offering compassionate, individualized support, you’ll help clients embark on a transformative wellness journey that truly lasts.
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
Learning outcomes:
•Welcome and introduction
•Course structure
•The complexity of weight issues
•Managing client expectations
•Explaining the effectiveness of hypnosis for weight loss
•Using a solution-focused approach
•The miracle question for weight loss
•Lifestyle considerations
•Self-hypnosis
•Helping build confidence
•Identifying common distorted thinking patterns
•Using Hypno-CBT for weight loss
•Setting up an anchor
•Linking mindfulness to weight loss
•Working with self-blame and self-dislike
•Using parts therapy
•Developing a 5 session weight loss programme
•Exploring the 5 session protocols in detail
•Marketing your weight loss practice
•Website content
•Resources
•References
Your course includes: All client scripts, resources, website content, practitioner guides and Certification which equates to 8 hours CPD, externally accredited by the ACCPH.
Course structure:
The Diploma in Hypnotherapy for Holistic Weight Loss is structured to provide a flexible and comprehensive learning experience for hypnotherapists. Delivered through a combination of video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, resources and practitioner guides, the course is divided into clear, self-paced modules. These modules cover the foundation of the Diploma in Hypnotherapy for Holistic Weight Loss practical hypnosis techniques, client management strategies, and marketing your services. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively implement the Diploma in Hypnotherapy for Holistic Weight Loss protocols in your practice.

 

Book Now          Contact us
 

Ref No: 2682
Supervisor’s Training Course
Successful competition, along with 2 years of experience in practice, will make a therapist eligible for GHR Acknowledged Supervisor status.

£350
Online format includes: written materials, PowerPoints and a recording of the live zoom training day. It also includes a certificate and a 1-2-1 hour long tutorial to discuss how you would like to proceed as a supervisor.
If you’re unable to make either date, you can still benefit from the training as extensive online materials and a recording of the live teaching date will be made available.
Over the course of two days, we’ll cover:
•What is supervision?
•Understanding GHR supervision requirements.
•Identifying the primary principles of supervision.
•Developmental model.
•Integrated model.
•Orientation specific model.
•Explaining GHR supervision requirements to supervisees.
•Marketing your supervision sessions.
•Understanding differences between 1-2-1 and group supervision.
•Learning how to manage group supervision.
•Recognising and dealing with supervisee transference.
•What is the role of the supervisor?
•History of clinical supervision.
•Comparing and contrasting supervision and therapy.
•Identifying signs of burnout and how to redirect your supervisees.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2758
Adaptive Therapy for Autistic Adults (ATAA®) Practitioner Training
Online self-paced course
£149
Adaptive Therapy for Autistic Adults (ATAA®) Practitioner Training
Are you a therapist or coach looking to better serve neurodivergent clients, particularly autistic adults? The ATAA® Practitioner Training is a comprehensive program designed to equip professionals from all therapeutic modalities with the skills and knowledge needed to create neurodivergent-friendly practices. From gaining a comprehensive understanding of what autism is, to learning how to adapt your communication style appropriately, you’ll emerge as a confident practitioner with a specialist knowledge in working with autistic clients.
With a special focus on Level 1 Autistic clients (formerly known as Asperger's Syndrome), this course sensitively addresses differences in communication, explores strategies for adapting traditional therapeutic methods, and ensures sessions meet the unique needs of autistic individuals.
What You’ll Learn:
•How to recognize potential signs of autism in clients and offer appropriate guidance.
•Strategies for overcoming communication challenges and creating supportive therapeutic relationships.
•Practical techniques to adapt traditional approaches to suit neurodivergent clients.
•Extensive resources to help you build a thriving neurodivergent practice.
Course structure:
ATAA® Practitioner Training is structured to provide a flexible and comprehensive learning experience for hypnotherapists. Delivered through a combination of video lectures and downloadable resources, including scripts, resources and practitioner guides, the course is divided into clear, self-paced modules. These modules cover the foundation of the ATAA® Practitioner Training, client management strategies, and marketing your services. With lifetime access to materials, interactive assignments, and certification upon completion, the course ensures you gain the knowledge and confidence to effectively implement ATAA® in your practice.
Learning outcomes
1. Welcome and Introduction
Welcome and introduction
Who is this course intended for?
ATAA® Practitioner status
Accessing course materials
About the author
A note on terminology
Copyright notice
Learning outcomes
2. What is Level 1 Autism?
Overview
What is life like for someone with Level 1 Autism?
Autistic traits
From linear model to pie chart model
Camouflaging
Late diagnosis
Women's autism
DSM-5 criteria
3. Is My Client Autistic?
Signs that may indicate autism
How to direct a potentially autistic client
Screening tests
4. Adult Autistic People's Therapeutic Needs
Overview
Mental health
Alexithymia
Meltdowns
Shutdowns
Friendship issues
Romantic relationships
Workplace issues
Making sense of the past
Addiction
Burnout
Autistic strengths
5. Limitations of Therapeutic Modalities
Overview
Cognitive Behavioural Therapy
Person-centred therapy
Psychodynamic therapy
Solution-focused therapy
6. Communicating Effectively with Autistic Clients
Overview
Creating rapport
Session structure and context
Metaphors and literal language
Issues with verbal communication
Misunderstanding vagueness and the "big picture"
Misreading the therapist's cues
Misreading the client's cues
Client cognitive flexibility and communication
Asking for assistance
Sustaining conversation & pacing sessions
Expressing emotions
Discussing interests
7. Practical Therapeutic Needs
Sensory processing
Pacing sessions
Support
8. ATAA® Protocol
Overview
Communication
Education
Emotional regulation
Identifying skills and abilities
Adapting goals and solutions
ATAA® Case studies
9. Client resources
10. References
With increasing demand for therapists skilled in working with neurodivergent adults, this training is your opportunity to grow your practice, attract new clients, and make a meaningful difference. While not exclusively focused on hypnotherapy, ATAA® provides valuable insights and techniques that hypnotherapists can integrate into their practice, enhancing their ability to effectively support autistic clients. This training is ideal for professionals across all modalities who want to broaden their expertise and develop a neurodivergent-friendly approach.
Only students who have undertaken this training are entitled to use the term ATAA® Practitioner and, on completion of the course which involves working through the materials provided online, you can contact Dr. Claire Jack and be listed as an ATAA® Practitioner on her client website.
For over 15 years, the Academy of the Inner Mind has been a trusted name in hypnotherapy education. Founded and led by Dr. Claire Jack, a seasoned hypnotherapist, accomplished author, and one of Psychology Today's in-house experts, the Academy blends expertise with a personal commitment to professional growth.
Our training programs are meticulously crafted to provide cutting-edge knowledge and practical skills that address the evolving needs of your clients. Whether you're a seasoned practitioner or just starting your journey, the Academy's courses are designed to ensure you stay ahead in the field of hypnotherapy.
You will receive everything you need to work confidently with your clients including scripts, client handouts, resources, practitioner guides and a certificate which is externally accredited by the ACCPH and counts for 8 hours CPD.
 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 


The Light Mind Training Centre
Joanne Dennis, Senior Clinical Hypnotherapist and Hypnotherapy Trainer
Location: Live, interactive online workshops via Zoom
 

Joanne Dennis is a Senior Clinical Hypnotherapist and experienced trainer who has worked in therapeutic practice for more than twenty years. She delivers GHSC-accredited hypnotherapy practitioner training and brings warmth, practical experience and a strong commitment to trauma-informed practice into her teaching.

The Light Mind is founded on the belief that becoming a good hypnotherapist involves more than learning scripts, techniques or collecting certificates. Training should develop the confidence, awareness and professional judgement to respond to the individual client. Joanne's experiential approach invites students to apply the learning to themselves, deepen their own self-awareness and then use it responsibly with clients, always grounded in consent, ethics and professional scope.

 

Ref No: 2874
Trauma-Informed Hypnotherapy
Work Safely, Confidently and Effectively
Sunday 25 October 2026
10.00am-4.30pm (UK time)
Live online via Zoom
£149 per person
Digital workbook, practical resources and Light Mind CPD certificate.
Trauma does not always arrive with a diagnosis or appear clearly on an intake form. This practical CPD day helps hypnotherapists recognise what may be happening beneath a client's presenting problem and respond with greater safety, sensitivity and confidence. Guided reflection helps participants notice their own responses and boundaries, without being asked to disclose or process personal traumatic experiences.
Who it is for:
Qualified and trainee hypnotherapists who want to make their everyday practice safer, more responsive and more sensitive to the effects of trauma.
Course content:
•What trauma-informed practice means within the role and scope of a hypnotherapist
•Recognising fight, flight, freeze, fawn, shutdown and subtle signs of activation
•Understanding the nervous system, the window of tolerance and the importance of regulation
•Creating safety through consent, choice, pacing and appropriate therapeutic language
•Adapting inductions, imagery and hypnotic work when a client finds relaxation difficult
•Grounding, orienting and stabilisation approaches for use within hypnotherapy sessions
•Reducing the risk of overwhelm, inadvertent retraumatisation and inappropriate regression
•Knowing when to pause, refer, seek supervision or work alongside another professional
•Reflective exercises to notice personal triggers, practitioner responses and boundaries without processing personal trauma
Practical outcome:
Participants will leave with a clear framework for recognising nervous-system responses, creating greater safety and adapting their hypnotherapy appropriately. Resources will include practical checklists, grounding approaches, safer-language guidance and an adaptable session-planning framework.
 

Book Now          Contact us


Ref No: 2875
The Intuitive Hypnotherapist
Trust Your Intuition Without Losing Professional Credibility
Sunday 15 November 2026
10.00am-4.30pm (UK time)
Live online via Zoom
£149 per person
Digital workbook, practical resources and Light Mind CPD certificate.
Many experienced therapists notice impressions, patterns or subtle shifts that are not captured by a script. This course explores how intuitive awareness can deepen therapeutic attunement when it is used thoughtfully, ethically and collaboratively. Participants explore their own responses and assumptions first; intuition informs curiosity and never replaces consent or professional judgement.
Who it is for:
Qualified and trainee hypnotherapists who want to develop their intuitive awareness, therapeutic presence and ability to respond flexibly while maintaining clear professional boundaries.
Course content:
•Understanding intuition as therapeutic awareness, attunement and informed curiosity
•Distinguishing intuitive impressions from projection, assumption, bias and personal activation
•Listening beyond words: tone, pauses, patterns, metaphor, emotion and bodily cues
•Developing greater trust in observation without treating impressions as facts
•Using intuition as a question rather than imposing an interpretation on the client
•Checking impressions collaboratively while preserving the client's autonomy and truth
•Working ethically with imagery, symbolism, cards and other intuitive tools when appropriate
•Gaining informed consent for intuitive or spiritually orientated approaches
•Describing and marketing intuitive services professionally without exaggerated claims
•Reflective exercises distinguishing intuition, projection and assumption
Practical outcome:
Participants will develop a grounded framework for bringing greater intuitive awareness into hypnotherapy without losing professional integrity. They will leave with reflective exercises, consent wording, ethical guidance, practical questions and adaptable ideas for integrating intuitive tools into sessions and services.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2876
From Qualified to Confident
Add Coaching Skills and Build a Practice That Works
Sunday 6 December 2026
10.00am-4.30pm (UK time)
Live online via Zoom
£149 per person
Digital workbook, practical resources and Light Mind CPD certificate.
Qualifying as a hypnotherapist and building a functioning practice require different skills. This practical course shows therapists how to add coaching skills to their work while using those same skills on themselves. Guided self-coaching builds confidence and turns their ambitions for a busy, sustainable practice into action.
Who it is for:
Newly qualified hypnotherapists, students approaching qualification and practitioners who have trained but have struggled to establish consistent professional practice.
Course content:
•Understanding coaching, hypnotherapy and professional boundaries, and how the approaches can work together
•Using purposeful questions, goals, accountability and action planning with clients
•Self-coaching to clarify your vision and work through confidence, visibility and imposter blocks
•Developing a confident professional identity and turning appropriate enquiries into bookings
•Structuring consultations, managing expectations and planning client journeys without relying on scripts
•Establishing fees, boundaries, records, confidentiality, insurance, GDPR and professional communication
•Choosing a focus and building visibility through trustworthy marketing, referrals and networking
•Creating an accountable 90-day plan for a busy, ethical and sustainable practice in 2027
Practical outcome:
Participants will leave with a framework for adding coaching to their hypnotherapy work, useful templates and a structured 90-day plan. Experiencing coaching themselves prepares them to use it responsibly with clients.

 

Book Now          Contact us
 
Ref No: 2877
Relationships in Hypnotherapy
Understanding Attachment, Love Languages and Repeating Patterns.
Sunday 24 January 2027
10.00am-4.30pm (UK time)
Live online via Zoom
£149 per person
Digital workbook, practical resources and Light Mind CPD certificate
Clients often seek hypnotherapy for anxiety, low confidence, jealousy, people-pleasing or repeated relationship difficulties without recognising the patterns beneath them. Guided exercises explore participants' own attachment tendencies, relationship style, needs and love languages before compassionate client application.
Who it is for:
Qualified and trainee hypnotherapists who want to understand how relationship patterns shape presenting problems, trust, safety and change.
Course content:
•Understanding attachment patterns and how early experiences can influence adult relationships
•Exploring love languages, relationship needs, communication styles and ways of giving and receiving care
•Guided reflection on personal attachment tendencies, relationship patterns and needs
•Recognising fear of abandonment, fear of intimacy, people-pleasing and loss of self
•Exploring repeating patterns, protective responses and connections with trauma and the nervous system
•Using hypnotherapy, imagery and parts work to support safety, self-worth and healthier relating
•Using personal insight ethically while maintaining boundaries and avoiding projection or over-identification
Practical outcome:
Participants will leave with insight into their own relationship patterns and a practical framework for recognising attachment, communication and love-language differences without labelling or assumption.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 


Yorkshire Hypnotherapy Training
Debbie Waller
Location: Distance Learning
 

Ref No: 2868
GDPR for Therapists: 2026 Update & Privacy Policy Guide
Home Study
£7.50
Tutor: Debbie Waller, Experienced hypnotherapist, tutor, and author of Anxiety to Calm, Their Worlds Your Words, The Hypnotherapist’s Companion, and The Metaphor Toolbox.
If you’re a hypnotherapist, counsellor, or other UK therapist in private practice, you need to understand how GDPR and UK data protection law apply to your client records, privacy policy, website, emails and everyday working practices. The Data (Use and Access) Act 2025 has updated several areas of UK GDPR, including Data Protection Complaints, Subject Access Requests, cookie rules, and legitimate interests. This short, practical guide explains what has changed and what you need to know and do, without wading through pages of legislation.
This 15-minute video presentation on GDPR in 2026 with a cookie notice guide is just £7.50
What’s in the Video?
keeping therapy client records under the GDPR
the 13 things your Privacy Policy needs to include
choosing lawful bases for processing client data
the data protection changes introduced in 2026
the new requirements for handling data protection complaints
Subject Access Requests for therapists
do you need a Legitimate Interests Assessment (LIA)?
direct marketing and email consent
cookie pop-up rules for therapists
subcontractors and Data Processing Agreements
data breaches and secure disposal of records
The emphasis throughout is on what these requirements mean in everyday language, rather than simply explaining the legislation. This means you can apply the rules to your practice quickly and easily.
This guide is based on my own research, knowledge and experience as a therapist and webmaster, and does not replace advice from a legal professional.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 


Jenesis Training

(practitioner training arm, delivered via jentle.org)
Jenna Nye, Certified Havening Techniques Trainer and board member of Havening Techniques Inc.
Location: In person in London or Surrey, UK

(final location confirmed by cohort numbers). Also delivered live online.
 

Ref No: 2859
Certified Havening Techniques® Training
Including a 1 day Integration Day and the Havening Techniques Full Practitioner Certification Programme.
3 days per cohort.
• In person: 7-9 November 2026
Training days: 9am-6pm (1 hour lunch, plus tea breaks)
Integration Day: 10am-5pm
Online: £963
In person: £1,111
Brief synopsis:
Havening Techniques is a psychosensory modality that uses applied therapeutic touch to resolve the biological encoding of fear, anger, sadness, shame and pain at the root, rather than managing symptoms on the surface. Over three days, practitioners learn the seven Havening protocols, the underlying neuroscience of how stored trauma is encoded and de-encoded, how to work safely with a client's pace and threat response regardless of the event's origin or timeline, and how to teach self Havening for crisis management and client empowerment. The method integrates with any existing therapy, coaching or holistic practice. The Integration Day allows time to practise, embed the protocols and consolidate learning, and the programme includes full practitioner certification with mentorship, group supervision, a student portal and direct access to the trainer.


 Book Now          Contact us 

 

ONLINE (PDF)


John Dewar School of Hypnotherapy
Location: Online (PDF format)


I understand that not everybody can or wants to attend specialist courses. You have previously invested and completed your practitioner training so you can learn from reading this specialist material in the comfort of your own home or office.
To this end I developed my own distance learning manuals and these are available in Pdf format only.
I do rely on you having the requisite skill set to use the processes and techniques which are written in a detailed prescriptive order.
You can read a copy of the exact content in each manual by below .
The manuals require an investment of only £55.00 each for the Alcohol-Age Regression-Pain-Phobia-Stop Smoking-Stress Management-Sub-Modality-Unexplained Infertility-Parts Therapy-Weight Management.
Inductions and Deepeners is £19.99 each.
Purchasers of any manual can buy the Inductions for £9.99. Must be ordered together.
Saving you time and £s on courses, travel & accommodation.
Each manual is specific to its’ subject and is not generic.
Correspondence learning Diplomas are available on submission of two case studies where some of the techniques have been used. One side A4 is succinct enough.
These diplomas are unique and stamped with the company seal. They cost only £23.00 each including postage.
Purchasing the manuals is easy just order via GHR.
Once paid your manual(s) in Pdf format will be Emailed.
Here is my latest Pdf Hypnotherapist workbook.

Ref No: 2843
Phobia Specialist
£55
PDF manual 18 x A4 Pages
A Phobia explanation.
Fear versus Phobia explained.
Abreaction and how to resolve quickly.
Safe place set up.
Ideo-Motor signals set up.
Fast Phobia step by step process. What to say and do etc.
A rewind process for phobic younger techy clients.
A Fast Phobia tool for teenagers.
Complex Phobia suggestions on how to resolve.
Calm anchor set up.
Induction.
Deepener.
Count back.
A certified Hypnotherapist or NLP practitioner will follow the process easily.
Written in an easy-to-follow way.
No need to travel to a course. No need to attend a course.
A printed copy can be posted for an additional £10.00.
A Diploma is available at £23.00 including posted after submission of 2 case studies where you have used this method to help clients.

 

Book Now          Contact us
 
Ref No: 2844
Working with Sub-Modalities
£55
PDF manual 15 x A4 pages
Examples of client issues. Suitable for Fear, Anger, Guilt, Sad, Phobias, Worry, Gag, Anxiety and much more. Anything where the client can remember the cause or a vivid memory or a time they felt their “issue”.
Content of workbook.
Outline on working with Sub Modalities
Tips for eliciting Sub Modalities
Tips for eliciting Sub Modalities continued and Tonality
12 step Process for changing Sub Modalities
Break State explained
Calibration explained
SUD scale explained
TOTE system explained
TOTE system example questions to ask
Questions to ask during client therapy session
Change elicitation work sheet for client therapy work
Concluding client session
A certified Hypnotherapist or NLP practitioner should follow the process easily.
Written in an easy to follow way.
No need to travel to a course. no need to attend a course.
A printed copy can be posted for an additional £10.00.
A Diploma is available at £23.00 including posted after submission of 2 case studies where you have used this method to help clients.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2845
Alcohol Control
£55
PDF manual 46 x A4 pages
Key Information
Alcohol Misuse information
Alcohol Risk Information
Alcohol Dependency Information
Alcohol Self Knowledge Test
Alcohol Myth Busters
Alcohol Calories Information
Alcohol Reduction Tip
Alcohol Client Diary
Alcohol Binge Drinking Information
Alcohol and Children. The Law
Alcohol Additional Information
Prescriptive Alcohol Client Session (Guide)
Prescriptive Metaphor for Aversion
Prescriptive Re-Frame Alcohol Template. Step by step
Prescriptive Parts Therapy (Using IMRs) Template. Step by step
Prescriptive Age Regression (Guide) Template. Step by step
Prescriptive The Swish Pattern. Step by step
Prescriptive New Behaviour (Guide) Template. Step by step
Prescriptive Process using Anchors for Aversion Template. Step by step
Prescriptive Amplify Post Hypnotic Template. (PHS)

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2846
Age Regression
£55
PDF manual 21 x A4 pages
Keys to Abbreviations
Client Explanation
Abreactions and how to deal with them
Setting Client Safe Place
Setting IMR Ideo Motor Response
Regression Sample Process Exercise
Assimilation and Integration
Dealing with “Resistance”. Example included
Understand Primary versus Secondary Gain
Induction Relaxed Body & Mind
Induction Tranquil Peace
Deepener Escalator

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2847
Inductions and Deepeners
£19.99 (or £9.99 when purchased at the same time as another of John Dewar's PDF Manuel courses)
PDF manual 29 x A4 pages
Induction Tranquil Peace
Induction Relaxed Body & Mind
Induction numbers 1-20
Induction Arm Levitation
Induction Bridge of Nose
Induction Hand to Eye
Induction Magnets on Hands
Induction Hand on Hand
Induction Surprise Catalytic
Induction Direct Gaze
Induction Surprise Handshake
Induction Rigid Arm
Induction Rigid Finger
Induction Coin Drop
Induction Eight Word
Induction Three Word
Deepener Heavy Arm
Deepener Neck and Forehead
Deepener Escalator
Test for Suggestibility Water Bucket
Test Suggestibility Hand Glued
Test for Hypnotic Somnambulism

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2848
Pain control
£55
PDF manual 39 x A4 pages
Pain and what it could be
Acute, Chronic, Psychosomatic & Psychological
Pain Causals
Complimentary Alternatives
Pain Gate Control
Phantom Pain Information
Communicating with Psychosomatic Pain
Obtaining Permission from the Sub-conscious
Therapy Visualising the Pain
Therapy Self Healing using your own mind
Therapy Pain Scale
Therapy Instant Analgesia for children
Therapy Control Panel
Therapy Glove Anaesthesia
Therapy Gestalt for Psychosomatic Pain
Therapy Sub-Modality Explanation
Therapy Sub-Modalities. What are they? VAKOG
Therapy Sub-Modality Elicitation Tips
Therapy Sub-Modality Process Order
Therapy Sub-Modality Questions to ask client
Therapy Sub-Modality Comparison Tool
Therapy Client Consultation Form
Induction Tranquil Peace
Deepener Escalator
 

Book Now          Contact us


Ref No: 2849
Parts Therapy
£55
PDF manual 37 x A4 pages
Outline of what Parts Therapy is
Working with Parts
Client Centred Therapy
When & with Whom to use Parts
Client Preparation for Parts work
Ideo Motor Response.
Creating a Safe Place
Hypnotherapist preparing yourself
IMR Setting up
Determine Trance Level & How to do so
Parts Therapy Open Questions Example
Primary Vs Secondary Gain
Development of my Parts Knowledge
Negotiation between Parts Example
Involving the Creative Part Process
Parts Therapy Process. 12 Steps
What to do when the problem returns

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2850
Stop Smoking manual content
£55
PDF manual 29 x A4 pages
Smoking statistics
Dealing with telephone enquiry
Answer the question; What is your success rate?
Commencing the session
Changing smokers belief
Question Addiction or Habit?
How you learned to smoke
Links to smoking
Smokers triggers
Smokers reasons not to stop
Session running order (Guide only)
How to re-do a session
Script for aversion therapy
Prescriptive Re-frame
Prescriptive Swish for change
Scripted metaphor
Setting Calm anchor
Scripted post hypnotic suggestion
Induction Relaxed Body
Deepener Escalator
Stop Vaping
ASA Advertising guidelines.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2851
Stress manual for individual client sessions
£55
PDF manual 52 x A4 pages
Stress explained
Warning to employers
Client session running order (A Guide)
Stress test
Pareto Rule
Weight of burden (Scripted)
How do you talk to yourself?
Client goal setting
Practice makes perfect
Scripted controlling your stress
Poster for your room
Autonomic nervous system information
Stress coping strategies
Prescriptive changing clients belief(s)
Changing clients’ behaviour. Prescriptive technique
Prescriptive Parts Therapy Template (Step by step)
Prescriptive Reframe (Step by step)
Prescriptive Swish on behaviour (Step by step)
Prescriptive Anchor Template (Step by step)
Prescriptive Amplify Post Hypnotic suggestion
Prescriptive Teach Self Hypnosis (Step by step)
Ten Step guide for beating Stress
Dewarisms to use as Stress Busters

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2852
Unexplained Infertility
£55
PDF manual 52 x A4 pages
Introduction to Manual
Explanation of Possible Causes of Infertility
Explanation of Possible Causes for Females
Explanation of possible causes for Males
My own explanation. Much shorter version
Questions to ask client. Template only
Client agreement. Template.
Therapy tool. Finish Sentence bespoke to Infertility
Therapy tool. Changing Clients Beliefs
Changing Clients Behaviour
Age Regression Example
Parts Therapy Example
Self-Healing on tubes
Self Hypnosis Example
Session Running Order. Template.
Session Order additional suggestions
Stress Buster Ideas
Calm Breathing Exercise
Script I do Deserve this
Script Improve Fertility
Induction Relaxed Body and Mind
Induction to Hypnotic Somnambulism
Deepener Escalator

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2853
Weight Management Manual
£55
PDF manual 45 x A4 Pages
Handling the Telephone enquiry
Session process for obtaining clients information
Prescriptive Why diets fail
4 Session suggested running order
How to reduce/remove cravings
Induction scripted
Deepener scripted
Aversion metaphor
Weight metaphor
6 Step Re-Frame prescriptive
Parts Therapy prescriptive Example (Easy to follow)
Utilising Creative Part Prescriptive
New Behaviour Template
Swish Pattern Prescriptive (Easy to follow)
Shrink Clients Stomach (Touching method) prescriptive
Shrink Clients Stomach (No touching method)
Aversion using a conveyor belt metaphor
Imaginary Gastric Band information for therapist
Imaginary Gastric Band Scene Setting
Imaginary Gastric Band Operation Template
Imaginary Gastric Band Adjustment
How to Amplify the PHS (Post Hypnotic Suggestion)
Metaphor “Movie in your mind”
Metaphor “Slimmer Dreamtime”
Group Induction
Group Sessions Template

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

ZOOM

 

Gold Leaf Training

(formerly Clem and Margaret Turner Therapy Training School)

Location: Zoom (or as stated below)

 

Ref No: 2659
Understanding Medication for Anxiety and Depression – Half Day CPD course via Zoom
Discounted Rate for members of the GHR, and NCH: £75 (Standard Price £85)
12 November 2026
Counts as 4 hours CPD
This is a CPD course that is run as a half day online session (4 hours), and is relevant for all therapists who help clients with anxiety, stress and depression.
The course bridges the gap between the medical approach to treating anxiety, stress and depression, and the knowledge that therapists have about treating these disorders. This can help give the therapists an insight into the severity of their clients’ conditions, give them an idea whether their clients’ symptoms may be side effects and allow them to understand client’s experience of drug withdrawal.
Most clients that therapists see have used traditional medicine first and with nearly 15% of the adult population taking anti-depressants, it could be a lot of clients that are taking these drugs.
On the course, the following learning outcomes are met:
At the end of the session, you will be able to:
•Understand the role of the neurotransmitters involved in anxiety, depression & stress
•Discuss how drug half-life & blood levels & controlled release formulations effect the individual’s treatment
•Identify the key NICE guidance relevant to treating anxiety & depression
•Describe the main drug groups used to treat each disorder
•Understand the way in which each drug group works
•Discuss the side effects of the drugs & issues relating to the cessation of treatment
•Identify how these side effects might impact therapy clients
In the Zoom session, students are also guided through the use of a number of additional resources that may be helpful to them.
Your Tutor Alison Gifford
Alison is a hypnotherapist and life coach, registered with the National Council of Hypnotherapy, and she is also a pharmacist with over 30 years of experience. In addition, she has 14 years of academic teaching experience in a School of Pharmacy.
What’s included:
In addition to receiving copies of the slide handouts, a detailed desktop reference is provided (over 40 pages) along with some published review papers to help the therapists understand the latest research in areas such as the gut biome and mental health. 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2818
Working with Children and Adolescents – Half Day Workshop

Introducing our Unique and Eclectic Programme for dealing with Children’s Issues
On-line via Zoom
27 November 2026
Discounted Rate for members of the GHR, NCH, & BIH: £99 (standard price £109)
Children and adolescents are increasingly suffering from mental health issues. This subject is frequently discussed on Radio, TV and on-line, and we are seeing an increasing number of children within our own practice.
Working with children and adolescents can be extremely rewarding but it requires great care and patience and is very different from treating adults. As children usually have great imaginations, they can be very receptive to hypnotherapy and other techniques which will be discussed during this workshop.
This half-day Workshop offers a step-by-step guide to the unique programme which Clem has developed and successfully used over the last 18 years.
It covers a variety of different issues, including behavioural problems, habits, lack of confidence, lack of motivation, self-esteem, bed wetting, hair pulling, eating issues, exam nerves, bullying, anger and many more.
On the Workshop you will learn:
•What has changed in society to cause increasing problems for children and adolescents?
•What is the programme and how does it help?
•Stages of children’s development
•What other help is available for children
•Legal and ethical requirements for working with children
•Working with parent/parents or guardian
•Using the programme with children and adolescents including how to build rapport
•A variety of common children’s issues and how best to deal with them
•A variety of inductions suitable for different stages of development
•A variety of deepeners suitable for different stages of development
•A variety of post hypnotic suggestions suitable for different stages of development
•A variety of different techniques and treatments for children and adolescents
•A variety of scripts suitable for different stages of development
•How to create your own scripts which are suitable for children
What’s included on the Workshop?
The cost of the Workshop includes all scripts, forms, a PowerPoint presentation, a certificate of attendance and ongoing support by phone or email after the workshop.
Tutor: Clem Turner
Clem has been successfully working with children and adolescents with their many different issues for the past 18 years. He has developed the programme which is based not only on Hypnotherapy but also includes other treatments which children respond well to.
The cost of the Workshop includes all scripts, forms, power point presentation, certificate of attendance and ongoing support by phone or email after the workshop.

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2779
The Burnout Ladder – Half Day Course
A Comprehensive Approach to Burnout Prevention and Recovery
5 February 2027
Live via Zoom, 9:30am – 3:30pm
Discounted rate for members of the GHR, NCH and BIH – £160 inc a copy of the trainers book

(Standard rate £170)
Are you ready to transform the way you support clients struggling with stress, anxiety, and burnout?
Our new CPD course for hypnotherapists, The Burnout Ladder, is designed to equip you with practical tools, insightful frameworks, and a deeper understanding of burnout. Whether your clients are facing workplace pressures or life’s broader challenges, this course is your gateway to effective identification, prevention, and recovery strategies.
Who Is This Course For?
This course is ideal for hypnotherapists who want to expand their toolkit to include a deeper understanding of the burnout phenomenon and its root causes. With burnout often concealed behind layers of stress and anxiety, this course will help you uncover these patterns in your clients, even in the earliest stages.
If you’ve ever worked with clients who feel overwhelmed and can’t pinpoint why, or those who seem stuck in cycles of exhaustion, The Burnout Ladder will provide the clarity and resources you need.
What You’ll Learn
This half-day course is packed with actionable insights, discussions, and tools to deepen your practice. Here’s what to expect:
1. Understanding Burnout
•Explore definitions of burnout, including WHO frameworks, and the latest research.
•Learn to identify who is at risk—beyond just work-related pressure.
•Breakout discussions and insights into the prevalence of burnout in modern life.
2. Causes of Burnout
•Delve into human responses to pressure and the habits that form burnout traps.
•Explore how burnout intersects with life circumstances and other underlying challenges.
3. The Burnout Ladder® Framework
•Learn the innovative six-rung ladder structure to outline stages of burnout.
•Gain a new language to understand, prevent, and resolve burnout—starting with prevention.
4. Detecting Burnout
•Understand how to use a 60-question burnout questionnaire to uncover symptoms and triggers.
•Learn to interpret qualitative and quantitative data, with practical role plays and coaching scenarios.
5. Treatment Approaches
•Discover 18 practical tools for burnout prevention and recovery.
•Develop personalised treatment plans to suit each client’s unique challenges and preferences.
•Integrate these tools seamlessly into your existing hypnotherapy practice.
Why Choose The Burnout Ladder?
Burnout isn’t just about work—it’s about life, baggage, and responses to pressure. This transformative course doesn’t just help you assist your clients; it helps you enhance your understanding of stress and mental health. With the tools provided, you’ll feel confident tackling burnout in its many forms, empowering your clients to thrive.
Included in Your Training
•Pre-Course Reading: Receive a copy of The Burnout Ladder book (hard copy or PDF).
•Exclusive Tools & Insights: Access a checklist of burnout causes, symptoms, and traps, as well as the ladder framework.
•Practical Resources: Take-home handouts, a comprehensive questionnaire, data interpretation tools, and a detailed guide to 18 burnout solutions.
•Real-World Application: Engage in breakout discussions, role plays, and hands-on coaching simulations.
About Your Tutor:
Alan Muskett is a wellbeing trainer, mindfulness coach, hypnotherapist, and now, an author. Giving up a 30-year career in food manufacture in 2019, he turned his attention to helping others get over what he suffered himself – burnout.
Hence, in 2024, he wrote and published his first book, The Burnout Ladder – How to Thrive in a Chaotic Workplace.
He works with individuals and teams to build resilience and prevent burnout, ensuring they have the tools to thrive and not just survive.
Using skills and experience he has picked up in both his business life as well as his mindfulness and hypnotherapy practices, he has developed a practical programme for coaches and therapists to help others avert this growing work/life balance crisis.
Identifying typical self-defeating human traps that lead us down the path to burnout, and a clear self-monitoring structure via the ladder metaphor, he provides solutions to potential burnout risks at whatever rung the client might be on.
He is hoping to become known as “The Lord of the Rungs”.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2780
Mindfulness for Hypnotherapists – One Day Course
A CPD Course for Stress Reduction and Emotional Clarity
29 January 2027
Live via Zoom, 10am – 4pm
Discounted rate for members of the GHR, NCH and BIH – £150 (standard price £170)
Are you ready to deepen your practice and help clients find peace and clarity in a fast-paced world?
Our full-day course, Mindfulness for Hypnotherapists, is specifically designed to equip hypnotherapists with essential mindfulness techniques. Whether you’re working with clients experiencing stress, anxiety, or emotional difficulties, this course will provide you with practical, experiential tools to guide them toward calm and contentment.
Who Is This Course For?
This course is tailored for hypnotherapists seeking to expand their toolbox with mindfulness-based approaches. If you’ve encountered clients struggling to stay present, navigate emotional challenges, or break free from habitual patterns, this course gives you actionable practices to address these needs.
What You’ll Learn
This full-day course is packed with experiential learning, meditations, and practical exercises aligned with a structured 6-week mindfulness programme. Here’s a glimpse of what you can expect:
1. Introduction to Mindfulness
•Practice foundational mindfulness meditations (breath, breath and body).
•Explore the benefits of mindfulness and its impact on the brain.
•Familiarise yourself with the first two weeks of the 6-week mindfulness programme.
2. Recognising Habits and Patterns
•Insights into mental models and autopilot behaviours.
•Techniques to foster awareness of thoughts and actions.
•Learn to embrace the present and distinguish between life situations and life itself.
3. Observing the Self
•Understand the power of now and learn to de-power the ego.
•Cultivate joy through simple, mindful observations of thoughts and feelings.
4. The Mindful Attitudes
•Discover Jon Kabat-Zinn’s 9 Attitudes of Mindfulness.
•Develop a checklist to assess mindfulness in daily life.
5. Navigating Emotional Difficulty
•Explore meditations to face, rather than avoid, emotional challenges.
•Practical steps for embedding mindfulness habits in both client sessions and personal practices.
6. Learning to Dance Again
•Techniques to balance nourishers versus depleters.
•Create a fulfilling life by combining clarity with joy.
•Final reflections on integrating mindfulness into your professional and personal life.
Why Choose Mindfulness for Hypnotherapists?
Mindfulness complements hypnotherapy techniques beautifully. While hypnotherapy often focuses on change, mindfulness emphasises acceptance and “being in the now,” opening fresh perspectives for your clients. This course equips you with both the wisdom and experiential tools to guide them toward meaningful transformation.
Included in Your Training
•Guided Scripts & Recordings: Breath and body meditations, working with emotional difficulty, and loving-kindness visualisations.
•Exclusive Resources:
oRecorded meditations and poems, including Autobiography in 5 chapters.
oKabat-Zinn’s 9 attitudes checklist.
o“Nourishers vs Depleters” handout.
•Recommended Reading: Mindfulness: Finding Peace in a Frantic World by Mark Williams.
About Your Tutor:
Alan Muskett is a wellbeing trainer, mindfulness coach, hypnotherapist, and now, an author. Giving up a 30-year career in food manufacturing in 2019, he turned his attention to helping others overcome what he had suffered himself – burnout.
In 2024, he wrote and published his first book, The Burnout Ladder – How to Thrive in a Chaotic Workplace.
He works with individuals and teams to build resilience and prevent burnout, ensuring they have the tools to thrive and not just survive.
Using skills and experience he has picked up in both his business life as well as his mindfulness and hypnotherapy practices, he has developed a practical programme for coaches and therapists to help others avert this growing work/life balance crisis.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2774
A Therapist’s Guide to Pain Management Techniques – Half Day Course live via zoom
5 December 2026
Discounted rate for members of the GHR, NCH and BIH – £99 (standard price £109)
In this course we will explore the neuroscience of pain, and what tools we can use to support with pain management.
We live in a chronic pain epidemic. Studies indicate that between 35% and 51% of the UK population experience chronic pain.
In this course, we will explore how pain is generated in the brain, and how that gives us a unique opportunity to use our minds to modify the pain experience.
We will look at how mind-body tools can be used to support people living with pain, and what we know about the science of why they work.
On the Workshop you will learn:
•What is pain?
•How is the brain involved in generating pain signals?
•What does research tell us about how we can modify pain signals
•Hypnotherapy and pain – how can Hypnotherapy help us with pain?
•Mindfulness and pain - how does Mindfulness help with pain?
•What tools can we teach our clients that will help them manage their pain levels effectively?
•Pain and sleep
•Red flags and contraindications for working with pain - how and when to refer
•Understanding pain and trauma, and the emotional toll of chronic pain
•How to work with pain with empathy, compassion and understanding
About your Tutor: Deborah Bircham
Deborah Bircham DipCNM, UKIHCA-RHC, Dip.Hyp, mNCIP, mANP,
Deborah is the founder of Live Well with Chronic Illness, and specialises in holistic support for people living with long-term illness. She is a Hypnotherapist, Mindfulness Teacher, Naturopathic Wellness Coach, and Integral Eye Movement Therapy (IEMT) Practitioner, and she combines health coaching with mindfulness and psychotherapy to support her clients to be as well as they can in mind and body. She works in ways that are neurodiversity and trauma-informed and has a particular interest in environmentally-acquired illness, and also in how we can support our physical wellbeing through self-care practices. She lives with chronic pain, MCAS, Dysautonomia and Lyme Disease, and uses her own lived experience of long-term illness to inform her work.
She is living proof that chronic illness needn’t prevent you from being able to lead a happy and meaningful life, and she supports people to connect with their inner wisdom to explore what that looks like for them. You can find out more about Deborah on here website, here. https://livewellwithchronicillness.co.uk/

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2775
Working with Chronic Illness Including Long Covid - Live via Zoom
21 November 2026
Discounted rate for members of the GHR, NCH and BIH – £150 (standard price £170)
We live in a chronic illness epidemic. Studies indicate that around 30% of the UK population has one chronic illness; many more live with multiple conditions.
In this course, we will explore some of the potential underlying causes for this chronic illness situation, and the most effective ways that we can support someone with chronic illness, as therapists, and what we should know in order to work safely with illness.
We will look at a holistic framework for supporting people with illness, and understand the neuropsychiatric manifestations of some illnesses, and how they might show up in your clients as ‘mental health’ issues.
We will look at what support someone with chronic illness needs, and how we can safely and effectively provide that, and also what we need to be aware of in order to work safely with clients who are ill.
On the Workshop you will learn:
•Causes of chronic illness, inflammation, and the neuropsychiatric manifestations of physical illness
•Red flags, contraindications, and when and how to refer
•A holistic framework to healing from chronic illness
•Nervous System regulation in chronic illness
•Safety in chronic illness
•Validation and advocacy in chronic illness
•Trauma and chronic illness
•Stress and inflammation
•Therapy tools for working with chronic illness
•How to avoid unintentional harm to those with chronic illness
•Issues you may encounter, and how to overcome them – troubleshooting when working with chronic illness
About your Tutor: Deborah Bircham DipCNM, UKIHCA-RHC, Dip.Hyp, mNCIP, mANP.
Deborah is the founder of Live Well with Chronic Illness, and specialises in holistic support for people living with long-term illness.
She is a Hypnotherapist, Mindfulness Teacher, Naturopathic Wellness Coach, and Integral Eye Movement Therapy (IEMT) Practitioner, and she combines health coaching with mindfulness and psychotherapy to support her clients to be as well as they can in mind and body.
She works in ways that are neurodiversity and trauma-informed and has a particular interest in environmentally-acquired illness, and also in how we can support our physical wellbeing through self-care practices. She lives with chronic pain, MCAS, Dysautonomia and Lyme Disease, and uses her own lived experience of long-term illness to inform her work.
She is living proof that chronic illness needn’t prevent you from being able to lead a happy and meaningful life, and she supports people to connect with their inner wisdom to explore what that looks like for them. You can find out more about Deborah on here website, here.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2773
Environmental Toxins and Detoxing – a Therapists Guide
A fascinating deep-dive into what toxins we are exposed to, the impact that these have on our health and wellbeing, and how we can reduce their impact.
Live via Zoom
7 November 2026
Discounted rate for members of the GHR, NCH and BIH – £99 (standard price £109)
We live in a toxic world – that is an unavoidable fact. Every day, we are exposed to a huge amount of chemicals, metals and other environmental pollutants.
But do any of us really understand what the potential impact of this is for our health and wellbeing? How do these substances affect us, physically and mentally?
Do you know how to recognise the signs of toxicity in your clients, and what the impact of daily toxin exposure might be for their symptoms like anxiety and depression?
On the Workshop you will learn:
• What are toxins
• Where do they come from, and how are we being exposed?
• How do they affect our physical and mental health – what is the evidence that these substances are a problem
• What are the possible symptoms of toxin exposure? How might you see that in your clients?
• How can we reduce our exposure to potentially toxic substances
• How can we support our bodies to detox
• Who you can refer to if you suspect toxicity might be a factor for your clients.
The course includes a certificate of attendance and relevant handout material, together with ongoing help after the course.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2760
Advanced Therapeutic Techniques – One Day Course on line via Zoom
18 November 2026, 10 – 4.30pm
Discounted Rate for members of the GHR, NCH, and BIH: £150 (Standard Price £170)
You already know how to help clients move forward. But some people keep looping — same pattern, same block, same return visit — and present-focused work alone isn’t enough.
This one-day course gives you three practical techniques you can use the next day in clinic: regression to cause and inner child work, parts therapy, and the clearance technique. Together they form a complete day of learning, demonstration, and hands-on practice.
Imagine being able to help your clients:
•Break free from recurring negative patterns: When a client is stuck despite good work in the present, regression to cause helps you find and resolve the root that keeps pulling them back.
•Resolve internal conflicts that sabotage progress: Parts therapy gives you a clear way to work with the inner struggle — the part that wants change and the part that won’t let it happen — so lasting change becomes possible.
•Heal the emotional wounds that drive current behaviours: Inner child work lets clients meet unmet needs with compassion, reducing the emotional charge that fuels today’s symptoms.
•Clear what’s left so change sticks: The clearance technique helps release residual thought patterns and emotional blocks after the deeper work, so clients leave freer to move forward.
•Work with more confidence on complex cases: Expand your toolkit with techniques that give you a clearer read on what’s really holding a client, and interventions that match that depth.
What you’ll learn in one full day:
•Regression to Cause & Inner Child: Master ethical, practical regression to find the origin of a problem, then use inner child work to heal what still drives the present.
•Parts Therapy: Learn how to identify conflicting parts, facilitate resolution, and help clients align conscious goals with subconscious drives.
•The Clearance Technique: A structured process for clearing leftover negative thought patterns and emotional blocks so the day’s deeper work can land and hold.
My training approach is a little different. I believe that learning should be an enjoyable and enriching experience, so I’ve created a unique learning environment that’s both supportive and stimulating.
I draw on my diverse background as a multi-disciplinary therapist to provide a rich and varied learning journey.
In my courses, you’ll find a blend of expert instruction, hands-on practice, and a collaborative atmosphere that fosters genuine learning and growth.
I aim to make sure my courses are fun, friendly and that my trainees know they have my full support.
About your Tutor: Dante Harker
Dante is an NCH-registered clinical hypnotherapist with over 25 years across counselling, hypnosis, NLP, EFT, parts therapy, coaching, and psychosexual work. He still runs a private practice — working with clients on anxiety, identity, relationships, and the stuck patterns that sit underneath — and he supervises other therapists, so he knows where practitioners get caught as well as where clients do.
With Clem and Margaret Turner, he founded Gold Leaf Training to teach the techniques he actually uses in the room. Delegates often say his days feel more like a proper workshop than a lecture: practical, energetic, and with room for humour. Regression, parts work, and clearance are tools he reaches for when present-focused work alone isn’t enough — and that’s what this course is built around.
Away from clinic and CPD, Dante has travelled to 90 countries, worked as a diving instructor, and opens his garden for charity. That wider life is part of how he teaches: curious, grounded, and less interested in theory for its own sake than in what helps a real client move.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2646
Overcoming Insomnia – Two Hour CPD Workshop Live Via Zoom
A step by step guide to our successful structured programme
4 November 2026
Counts as 2 hours CPD
Discounted Rate for members of the GHR, NCH & BIH: £75 (Standard Price £80)
Hypnotherapists and other health care professionals regularly see clients who have difficulty sleeping. This workshop is for Hypnotherapists who are keen to understand and improve their clients sleeping patterns, giving a step by step guide to our structured but flexible four week programme.
Having poor sleep can cause a number of difficulties including fatigue, irritability, poor memory, mood swings, or not able to think clearly. Clients with insomnia also risk many health conditions because their bodies haven’t been through the ‘rest and repair’ stages of sleep.
Some clients have difficulty falling to sleep because of a racing mind, others may be able to fall asleep but wake in the middle of the night and can’t go back to sleep.
The basic definition of insomnia is: The difficulty falling asleep or staying asleep, and poor quality sleep – and this is what most of your clients will come to you for help with.
On the workshop you will learn:
•Why do we need sleep and how much do we need?
•The Sleep Cycle/Sleep Wake Homeostasis
•The Circadian Rhythm
•The different stages of sleep
•Problems that cause insomnia
•Problems that insomnia causes
•Helpful techniques to slow down a racing mind
•Creating a comfortable sleep environment
•Techniques to improve sleep
•Lifestyle questionnaire
•Our unique 4 week Insomnia Programme
About Your Tutor:
Margaret Turner qualified as a Hypnotherapist in 2006. Since that time she has specialized in Anxiety, Weight Management, smoking cessation and working with insomnia clients. Over that time she has developed a four week programme for clients who come to her for help with insomnia which is the subject of this Workshop. Margaret works with her husband Clem in their successful Therapy Practice in Retford, north Nottinghamshire.
As with all our workshops and courses, we provide comprehensive handout material and this includes:
•A lifestyle questionnaire
•All relevant scripts
•Detailed information pack for clients on Overcoming Insomnia
•Techniques and treatments for insomnia
•Certificate of attendance
•This workshop is live via Zoom -
•Commences at 10am
•The workshop will finish at approximately 12 noon

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2590
Parts Therapy and Effective Techniques to Grow your Practice - Live via Zoom
Half Day Workshop - Learn Dr Brian Roet’s unique Parts Therapy techniques and many others
Discounted Rate for members of the GHR, NCH & BIH: £99 (Standard Price £109)

31 October 2026
Counts as 3.5 CPD hours
Tutor Dr Brian Roet has run Workshops for Hypnotherapists all over Europe and now we are privileged to offer his amazing Parts Therapy Workshop live via zoom.
His workshop is aimed at teaching parts therapy and a variety of other new skills to qualified hypnotherapists—whether just starting or fully experienced.
During his forty years of using hypnotherapy Dr Roet has learnt many techniques which can be used for a variety of problems and issues. This workshop will teach delegates by demonstration, discussion, handouts and practice, how to use the techniques when working with clients.
Some of the subjects discussed will be---the Inner World; connecting logic and emotion; reducing stress and anxiety; treating panic attacks; using a specific technique he calls “The Projectionist” to change internal pictures.
On the Workshop you will learn
1. Dr Roet’s unique parts therapy technique
2. Using metaphors with clients
3. Understand unconscious messages
4. How to gain deeper empathy and connection with the client
5.Improve communication with the client
6.Understand the importance of clean language
7.Practice Dr Roet’s unique techniques to use with clients
Your Tutor:
Dr Brian Roet was a G.P. and Anaesthetist in Melbourne, Australia before moving to London many years ago. He has practiced psychotherapy and hypnotherapy for the last four decades and now has over 15,000 hours experience of therapy with clients.
Dr. Roet has written extensively on Hypnosis, Confidence, and Feelings—all relevant to his therapy, and runs workshops in the U.K and overseas. His detailed works are often used as hypnosis textbooks and all are available on www.amazon.co.uk.
The cost of the workshop includes relevant handouts, certificate of attendance plus ongoing support by phone or e-mail.


Book Now          Contact us


Ref No: 2579
Past Life Regression – One-day CPD Workshop Live via Zoom
For Self-Development and Therapeutic Change

Date TBC
Discounted Rate for members of the GHR, NCH & BIH: £150 (Standard Price £170)
Online live via Zoom – counts as 6 hours CPD
Do you believe in past lives? If you do, then how interesting would it be to regress and see who you might have been in that past life? And on top of that, how great would it be to offer this as a service for your clients?
If you don’t believe, then how would you like to learn hypnotic techniques that give you a deeper insight into your own or your client’s subconscious?
Whether it’s actually a past life or not, there is insight in what our subconscious chooses to show us.
This course will provide underlying theory, research, and interesting science around past life regression. However, the majority of the course will teach you techniques to illicit past lives and allow you to practice those new skills, and use them with clients in the future.
In the Workshop you will learn:
•What is past life regression? Is it real? Does it need to be real to have therapeutic benefits?
•What does the research say? There are now countless ‘proven’ examples of past lives
•The first law of thermodynamics and Continuation Theory – Clever words that might just give an easy explanation behind past lives
•Do past lives have past lives? And what if this is your first-time round?
•Hypnotic techniques to regress into past lives
•Safety precautions when regressing into past lives
•Recording a past life for fun and where to go next
•Using past lives for therapeutic gain
•Princess or Pauper – how to gain benefit from past lives that just weren’t that exciting
•Fun or therapy – how to get the most out of the experience
About your Tutor: Dante Harker
Dante is a multi-disciplinary therapist, with over 20 years’ experience working with clients. He has developed an integrated approach to therapy including his own therapeutic techniques, Hypnotic Boxes™ and the brand-new Thought Vacuum™. He is also a certified counsellor, psychosexual specialist, NLP Master Practitioner, Life Coach, EFT and Hypnotherapist (and compulsive course taker).
What’s included?
The cost of the workshop includes worksheets to use with clients, all scripts and the presentation for later reference, a certificate of attendance and ongoing support by phone or e-mail.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2555
Weight Management Programme – One Day Workshop Live Via Zoom
A step by step guide on how to help your clients to successfully achieve their goals
Discounted Rate for members of the GHR, NCH & BIH: £150 (Standard Price £170)
Date TBC
Counts as 5 hours CPD
Hypnotherapy is great to help people reduce their weight but success is not all down to Hypnotherapy. We have found over years of specializing in weight management that it’s also important to coach the client, giving them the knowledge and the motivation they need in order to change their relationship with food.
Most clients we see say they know what they should and shouldn’t be eating but they lack the willpower to do anything about it. Our five week motivational weight loss programme is designed to offer coaching and motivational support combined with hypnosis and nutritional help. It will not only help you to help your client to reduce their weight, but it will also give you, the therapist the confidence to stimulate and motivate your client to reach their goal weight and size.
Our Weight Management Programme has been successfully running for many years and most of my work comes from recommendations from satisfied clients. This workshop offers you the opportunity to learn this unique 5-week programme which you can start using with your clients immediately.
On the Workshop you will learn:
•Weight Management Programme Step by Step guide
•How to help your clients to lose weight and then keep it off
•All scripts, forms and homework tasks to keep the client motivated
•Information packs for your clients that will educate, inspire and motivate them
•How to encourage your clients to have a healthy relationship with food and exercise
•Techniques to reduce food cravings and stop emotional eating
•Help clients to have a better self-image and more confidence
•Advice on Healthy eating and nutrition
•How to identify and deal with blockages - creating solutions that work
Your Tutor:
Margaret Turner works with her husband Clem in their Therapy Practice in Nottinghamshire. She has specialized in Weight Management for many years, and is the creator of the five week Weight Management Programme which is the subject of this Workshop.
The cost of the workshop includes handouts, all scripts and forms, PowerPoint presentation, certificate of attendance plus ongoing support by phone or e-mail.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2557

Men’s Psychosexual Health – Half Day CPD Workshop - Live via Zoom
A four session plan for Therapists
28 October 2026
Discounted Rate for members of the GHR, NCH, and BIH: £99 (Standard Price £109)
Counts as 3.5 hours CPD
The Big Four, a Four-Session Plan & Essential Tools.
Though men’s psychosexual health is often overlooked, it significantly impacts their overall well-being and relationships.
This frank and open 4-hour intensive workshop provides you with a practical toolkit to support men and their partners effectively – giving you techniques you can implement immediately in your practice.
What you’ll gain:
•Understanding ‘The Big Four’: Explore the common challenges of erectile dysfunction (including ‘millennial ED’), premature ejaculation, and delayed ejaculation – (Four: Not getting hard, not staying hard, orgasming too quick, not orgasming at all.)
•A Four-Session Plan: Leave with a structured framework to guide clients through their concerns.
•Essential Communication Skills: Develop confidence in navigating sensitive conversations with clients of any gender.
•Therapeutic Tools & Techniques: Learn how to adapt scripts, anchoring, home-based exercises, and other approaches to address these specific issues.
•Psychosexual Adaptations: Discover how to transform common therapy techniques, like anchoring and affirmations, into powerful tools for addressing psychosexual concerns.
•The Referral Question: Learn the essential question to determine if your client’s issue requires medical intervention or if it falls within your scope of practice.
•‘Turning Sex into a Hobby’: Explore this innovative approach to help clients rebuild intimacy and a healthy sex life.
•The Edge & Squeeze Technique: Learn this valuable technique to support the 1 in 3 men who experience premature ejaculation.
Pre-course reading to maximise in-person learning: Key information will be covered in advance, allowing the workshop to focus on practical application and skill-building.
Note: This course maintains a supportive and informative environment, acknowledging the sensitive

of this topic.
What’s included in the course?
The cost of the workshop includes worksheets to use with clients, all scripts and the presentation for later reference. Plus, lifetime access to Dante’s Google Drive of 250 plus scripts.
Attendees also receive a certificate of attendance and ongoing support by phone or email.
About your Tutor: Dante Harker
Dante is a versatile professional with over 25 years of experience as a multi-disciplinary therapist. He started his career in therapy as a counsellor and later became the youngest director of the LMA (Local Mind Organisation) at the age of 26. Dante has many years of senior-level charity management experience and has added various therapeutic techniques to his toolbox, including training in NLP, hypnosis, EFT, Life Coaching, Past Lives, and psychosexual psychotherapy.
After years of working in management, Dante transitioned to private practice, where he developed a range of techniques that he now teaches to other therapists. In his free time, Dante enjoys travelling and has visited 85 countries. He is also a diving instructor, personal trainer, and yoga instructor, and he takes pride in his garden, which he opens for charity.

 

Book Now          Contact us
 

Ref No: 2517
Anxiety, Stress, Panic Attack and PTSD Programme –
One Day Workshop Live Via Zoom  
Discounted Rate for members of the GHR, NCH & BIH: £150 (Standard Price £170)

13 November 2026
Counts as 6 hours CPD
A step by step guide on how to successfully help your clients through their issues
Anxiety is probably the number one reason why clients come to see Hypnotherapists and this special training Workshop gives you an opportunity to learn our unique Treatment Programme which incorporates methods of overcoming Anxiety, Stress, Panic Attacks and PTSD. The Workshop will teach you everything you need to know to be up and running immediately with this proved tried and tested system.
On the Workshop you will learn:
•How to understand stress, anxiety, stress and panic
•How to establish if a client is suffering from PTSD
•What happens psychologically and physiologically to us in times of stress
•The difference between stress, anxiety and PTSD
•How to check and monitor your clients anxiety or PTSD levels
•A step by step guide to our 6 week Programme
•All relevant scripts and forms to use with the programme
•Information packs for your clients that will educate, inspire and motivate them
•Coping skills for anxiety stress and to give immediate relief from symptoms
•Dealing with blockages
About your Tutor: Clem Turner
Clem has specialized in clients who suffer from anxiety, stress and panic attacks for 17 years. He has also worked with many PTSD sufferers with extremely successful results. He has developed a unique six week structured programme for dealing with such clients. This Workshop offers you a step by step guide to working with clients who are suffering from these problems.
The cost of the workshop includes handouts, all scripts and forms, power point presentation, certificate of attendance plus ongoing support by phone or e-mail.
This workshop is live via Zoom
Commences at 10am
Break at 11.15 for 15 minutes
Break for lunch at 12.30pm for 30 minutes
Recommence at 1pm
Break at 3.15pm
Recommence at 3.30
Workshop ends at approximately 4.30pm

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2520
Certificate in Menopause Support –
One Day Workshop Live Via Zoom
Explores various ways to help clients who feel overwhelmed by their menopausal issues
Date TBC
Discounted Rate for members of the GHR, NCH & BIH: £150 (Standard Price £170)
Online Via Zoom
Counts as 5 hours CPD
Poorly understood for far too long, the menopause disrupts hormone balance sending things out of sync. Working tirelessly in the background Hormones are misunderstood and underestimated. Hormones playing a key in how we look, feel, think and behave and when out of balance life can feel overwhelming.
Shrouded in mystery and sometimes shame peri-menopausal and menopausal women often carry on regardless, frequently suffering in silence until they run out of resilience often leaving work, not meeting friends feeling alone lost and exhausted.
The menopause transition can be a challenging experience, many women simply do not understand what is happening to them thinking they are going mad. This is where well-being professionals can play a key supporting role.
This one day workshop has been developed to provide well-being professionals with an overview of the physical and psychological issues of the menopause. We will explore various ways in which you can support your clients.
Subjects covered on the workshop include:
•What is menopause?
•When does menopause happen?
•What are the symptoms of menopause?
•What are the choices?
•How can menopause affect women?
•How can menopause affect work?
•How can menopause affect relationships?
•How can well-being professionals help?
•Menopause and beyond
•Menopause and self-care
Research has shown that therapy combined with visualizations stress reduction and confidence building significantly improve a woman’s experience of her menopause.
The Workshop will guide you systematically through a unique ‘Embrace Programme’ and you will be able to equip your clients to let go of fear and anxiety.
The day includes information to support clients with diet, nutrition, well-being and lifestyle information. Scripts and intake forms to download and ways to encourage women to adapt to the changes naturally, efficiently and to comfortably say “Yes, I am going to embrace my amazing life.”
The fact is menopause does happen to every woman and the aim of this workshop is to share how to focus energy on how to feel good again. To think of the menopause as a halfway point and all of the changes, not just the physical ones, will help shape the next 50 years of your clients life.
About Your Tutor:
Kim Thomas is a psychotherapist and hypnotherapist. She has qualifications in Human Services, Counselling, Hypnotherapy, EFT, pain management, parts therapy, and mindfulness. She runs a private practice in the East Midlands. She also runs community based “TAGS” Think and Get slim group sessions working with people who struggle to get accesses to any other support with being overweight.
The cost of the workshop includes handouts and outline scripts, certificate of attendance plus ongoing support by phone or e-mail.
This workshop is live via Zoom -
Commences at 10.30 am
Break at 11.15 for 15 minutes
Break for lunch at 12.30pm for 30 minutes
Recommence at 1pm
Break at 2.15pm
The workshop will finish at approximately 3.30pm

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2523
Using Emotional Freedom Techniques with Clients – One Day Workshop Live Via Zoom
A step by step guide on how to use EFT to enhance a client’s life
Discounted rate for members of the GHR and NCH: £99 (Standard Price: £109)
20 November 2026
EFT, commonly known as ‘tapping’, is a type of energy psychology and is a form of non-invasive acupuncture. EFT works on the principal that all negative emotions are disruptions of the body’s energy systems. EFT is a quick release mechanism that works by simply tapping on various energy meridian points whilst talking about a negative issue, which puts the body and mind back in balance.
This technique is easy to learn and has been helping reduce negative emotions for many years since 1995 when it was founded in the USA by Gary Craig.
Following all the recent upsetting and uncertain events caused by the pandemic, we are finding more and more people need help quickly with issues and problems that have appeared in the last couple of years. In order to help your clients to the maximum potential, why not consider adding Emotional Freedom Technique to your therapeutic toolbox?
EFT will help clients with many different problems and difficulties including:
•Removing Negative Emotions
•Reducing or Eliminating Cravings
•Reducing or Eliminating Anxiety, Trauma and PTSD
•Reducing or Eliminating Pain
•Reducing or Eliminating Fears and Phobias
•Implementing Positive Goals
During the workshop you will have the opportunity to learn the principles of EFT and then to practice this with other delegates. As always with our workshops we guarantee to give ongoing support to delegates following the conclusion of the workshop by either phone or email.
On the workshop you will learn:
•An explanation of EFT
•How does it work?
•How does EFT make the changes?
•What happens to the body
•The Basics of EFT
•An explanation of each tapping point
•The set up
•Psychological Reversal
•The Choices Method
•The Movie Technique
About your Tutors: Clem & Margaret Turner
Clem and Margaret have a successful therapy practice in Retford, Nottinghamshire. Clem qualified as a hypnotherapist in 2004 and Margaret in 2006. Over the years they have gained knowledge in many different therapies such as NLP and EFT and use these techniques with their clients in conjunction with Hypnotherapy.
They both feel that it is important for any hypnotherapist to have other techniques and treatments available in order to give their clients the best possible experience and success at eliminating the problems and issues they need help with.
The cost of the workshop includes all relevant handouts and certificate of attendance plus ongoing support by phone or e-mail.
This workshop is live via Zoom
Commences at 10am
Break at 11.30 for 15 minutes
Break for lunch at 1pm for 30 minutes
Recommence at 1.30pm
Workshop ends at approximately 3.30pm

 

Book Now          Contact us

   

Ref No: 2639
Making an MP3 Recording for your clients – Two Hour Workshop Live Via Zoom
Showing step by step how to use software Audacity for your recordings
25 November 2026
Discounted price of £65 for members of the GHR and NCH (standard price £80)
It is known that giving your client an MP3 to listen to in the comfort of their own home has great benefits:
•It consolidates the suggestions given in the therapy room
•Has extra perceived value
•Ensures your client has some ‘me time’
•After sessions, they can listen to the recordings.
•We learn by listening – children learn to speak before they can read or write
Over the years that we have been running workshops for qualified hypnotherapists, we have been asked many times how to make professional quality recordings for clients. These recordings must be of a high standard, with good sound and, if required, additions like binaural beats, subliminal messages and copyright free music.
This Workshop has been designed so that you can follow the very comprehensive visual and written instructions in order to achieve a good, professional quality MP3 recording which you will be proud to send to your clients.
On the Workshop you will learn:
•How to produce professional quality MP3’s with Audacity
•How to correct mistakes
•Adding silence
•Deleting long unwanted sections
•Adding affirmations
•Adding subliminal messages
•Adding binaural beats
•Adding copyright free music
•How to manage files and store MP3’s
•How and why to save your projects
•How to save finished recordings
•How to send the recordings to your clients
Tutor Clem Turner:
Clem has been a qualified hypnotherapist since 2004 and has specialized in anxiety, PTSD, Pain Management and Working with Children for many years.
Clem has helped many people to produce professional MP3’s for clients and has been asked to put together this workshop so that more people can benefit from his knowledge.
What’s included?
Step by step instructions how to record an MP3 for your clients which you can follow when making your own recordings – plus a recording of the workshop for you to work with afterwards.
On-going support from Clem if you still have questions after you have experienced the workshop.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

Yorkshire Hypnotherapy Training & Phoenix Therapy
(Debbie Waller & Brian Turner)
Location: Self-Paced Distance Learning


Ref No: 2839
Advanced Hypnotherapy Practitioner Training
Self-Paced Distance Learning for Experienced Hypnotherapists
Introductory Offer: £750
(Regular price £825)
Many hypnotherapists reach a point where standard protocols alone no longer feel quite enough. As experience grows, therapists often find themselves wanting a deeper understanding of why certain approaches work well with one client and not another, greater flexibility in their therapeutic work, and more confidence when working with complexity.
This Advanced Hypnotherapy Practitioner Training course has been designed for qualified practitioners who wish to develop both their practical skills and their clinical thinking beyond practitioner level.
Rather than simply teaching additional techniques, the course focuses on helping therapists think more reflectively and critically about their work, understand the reasoning behind therapeutic decisions, and adapt more thoughtfully to individual clients.
The Advanced Hypnotherapy Practitioner Course offered by Yorkshire Hypnotherapy Training and Phoenix Therapy has been assessed and accredited at Advanced Practitioner level by the General Hypnotherapy Standards Council (UK). Graduates from this training (with appropriate experience in practice) are eligible to apply for professional registration at Advanced Practitioner status with the GHSC/GHR.
Course Includes:
317-page training manual
Separate portfolio workbook
Unlimited email support
Up to four hours of one-to-one tutorial support
Portfolio marking and feedback
Immediate digital access to materials
No completion deadline
Printed and/or PDF certificate on successful completion
Topics include:
Advanced models and theories of hypnosis
Factors that facilitate or impede change
Advanced questioning and communication skills
Working flexibly without scripts
Integrating approaches from different therapeutic models
Research literacy and evidence-based practice
Critical thinking and evaluating claims
Ethical decision-making and professional dilemmas
Reflective practice and professional development
Supervision, peer support, and ongoing practitioner growth
Assessment
Assessment is portfolio-based and includes:
Multiple-choice questions
Short-answer reflective questions
Client vignettes
Reflective practice tasks
A Personal Development Plan
Study Expectations
The course is academically informed and encourages reflective and critical thinking, while remaining accessible and clinically relevant for practising therapists.
As the course is self-paced, study time varies between students depending on depth of reading, reflection, and wider exploration of the recommended material.
Tutors:
Debbie Waller:
Experienced hypnotherapist, tutor, and author of Anxiety to Calm, Their Worlds Your Words, The Hypnotherapist’s Companion, and The Metaphor Toolbox.
Brian Turner:
Psychotherapist specialising in anxiety and depression, placement coordinator for Stamp Out Suicide, and author of Lessons Learned in the Therapy Business and Echoes of Empathy.
Together, they bring a combination of practical hypnotherapy experience, psychological understanding, reflective practice, and real-world therapeutic insight.
Investment:
Introductory Offer: £750
(Regular price £825)
Suitable For:
Qualified hypnotherapists who wish to develop greater flexibility, confidence, reflective practice skills, and deeper understanding in their therapeutic work.
This course is not suitable as an entry-level training course in hypnotherapy.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

ZOOM


Axiom Academy of Clinical Hypnotherapy
(Charlotte Mather)
Location: Zoom


Ref No: 2836
Working with Neurodivergent Clients
4th November 2026 or 21st November 2026
10:00am – 3:00pm (UK)
Online (Zoom)
£175
This one-day CPD training supports hypnotherapists in working more effectively with neurodivergent clients, including those with ADHD, autism, and sensory sensitivities.
The training explores how neurodivergence impacts processing, regulation, communication, and therapeutic engagement. Participants will learn how to adapt their language, structure, and approach to better meet client needs, while avoiding common pitfalls such as overstimulation, misattunement, or inappropriate pacing.
The focus is on creating safe, flexible, and client-led sessions that respect neurodivergent ways of experiencing the world.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

Academy of Advanced Changework
(Karen Bartle)
Location: Distance Leaning or Zoom (see below)
 

Ref No: 2829
Advanced Diploma in Hypnotherapy – AdvDipH
Distance Learning
£529
Accreditation:
AHA – Australian Hypnotherapists Association
ASCH – Australian Society of Clinical Hypnotherapists
GHSC – General Hypnotherapy Standards Council, leading to GHR/General Hypnotherapy -Register upgrade to Advanced Practitioner (ADPR) Status
IHA – International Hypnosis Association
NCP – National Council of Psychotherapists
ICP – International Council of Psychotherapists
Course principals, writers and tutors:
Paul Peace, PhD Psychology, BSc (Hons) Psychology, PgCert Social Science Research Methods, Advanced Diploma Hypnotherapy, HPD, Certificate in Hypnotherapeutic Supervision.
Karen Bartle, MSc Health Psychology, BSc (Hons) Psychology, HPD, Advanced Diploma in Hypnotherapy, Certificate in Hypnotherapeutic Supervision.
Level:
FHEQ Level 6, NQF Level 6, Degree with honours standard
Syllabus:
Hypnotherapy theory
Factors that facilitate or impede change in clients, e.g., extratherapeutic factors
Advanced clinical approaches and techniques including working without scripts
Working with less often taught presenting issues, e.g., blushing and eczema
Advanced questioning techniques
Psychological models of change, e.g., Health Action Process Approach and Self-Efficacy
Logical and academic reasoning
Critical thinking
Research methods (first and second year degree level)
Locating and understanding hypnotherapy research
Statistics
Research ethics
Handling awkward situations with clients
Advanced ethical training, e.g., dilemmas, working with people we know, power, epilepsy
Professional development, e.g., Personal Development Plan, being reflective, ethically retaining clients, group hypnotherapy, setting up and managing peer groups
Time investment:
136 hours total:
40 hours - reading manual (twice through is recommended as this is a training manual)
25 hours - recommended reading
10 hours - 'thinking time around the reading', e.g., on more complex ethical issues
20 hours - practicing new techniques with clients
15 hours - homework
10 hours - engaging with the research literature
16 hours - attending group/individual supervision & workshops & engaging with material in the Practice Building Hub for Qualified Hypnotherapists portal
Time may also have been invested in areas that are more difficult to assess, such as discussions with tutors, supervisor and peers regarding issues raised by the course.
Please note that actual time spent by students will vary, depending on variables such as breadth of reading, reading speed, homework efficiency, voluntary practice over and above minimum requirements, etc.
This is our estimate as course tutors.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2830
Unmitigated Agency – Managing Over-Control and Relational Dominance
Live Online 3hr CPD Workshop for Mental Health Practitioners
Date TBC
£69
This 3-hour interactive training workshop supports compassionate mental health professionals to work more effectively with clients who appear highly driven, dominant, intensely solution-focused, or resistant to emotional depth.
Rather than mislabelling over-control as confidence, arrogance, or narcissism, this workshop introduces a psychologically informed framework that understands unmitigated agency as a threat-based protection response.
You’ll learn how perceived loss of control, autonomy threat, and subtle power dynamics shape engagement and defensiveness. The focus is practical, ethical, and clinically grounded — helping you recognise early signs of control-based withdrawal, prevent power struggles, and foster emotional flexibility without undermining autonomy.
What will this training give you?
• A clearer understanding of why over-control and dominance emerge in therapy
• Practical ways to prevent competitive or power-based ruptures
• Greater confidence working with clients who interrupt, correct, or take control of sessions
• Skills to validate competence without reinforcing over-functioning
• Tools to gently expand emotional tolerance without triggering defensiveness
• A framework to differentiate healthy agency from control-based protection
Teaching Methods:
This training is delivered live online and uses a mix of brief expert instruction, facilitated discussion, live demonstration, and supported practice.
Participants engage in:
• Guided reflection on clinician countertransference
• Clinical vignette analysis
• Structured role-play scenarios
• Power-dynamic awareness exercises
• Micro-repair practice
Downloadable worksheets and participant reference materials are provided to support integration into clinical practice.
Assessment/Evidence of Learning:
Learning is evidenced through active participation in guided reflection activities, clinical discussion, and practical exercises during this live workshop.
Participants demonstrate learning through:
• Identification of coping patterns in vignette material
• Appropriate formulation of control-based regulation
• Use of autonomy-protective language in role-play
• Demonstration of de-escalation skills
Participants receive a statement of attendance for 3 CPD hours.
About the Presenter:
Karen Bartle is a postgraduate in Health Psychology, Advanced Clinical Hypnotherapist, clinical supervisor, co-founder of the Academy of Advanced Changework, founder of HealthTalk Psychology, and co-author of The Advanced Hypnotherapist.
For over 25 years, Karen has worked with individuals, caregivers, and health professionals navigating behavioural and psychosocial challenges. She has seen how practitioners can feel destabilised by highly
dominant, intellectually sharp, or over-functioning clients — and how reframing control as protection transforms the therapeutic relationship.
Karen’s teaching style blends psychological depth with practical clarity. She is known for translating complex relational dynamics into usable clinical language and creating reflective learning spaces that feel safe, structured, and clinically relevant.
Who is the course for?
This training is designed for practitioners who want to feel more confident working with clients who:
• Appear highly controlling or dominant
• Resist emotional inquiry
• Trigger competitive or power dynamics
• Over-function and struggle with vulnerability
• Present with stress-related or performance-based difficulties
It is especially suited to practitioners working with high-achieving professionals, burnout, health behaviour change, anxiety, and control-based coping patterns.


Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2857
Unmitigated Communion – Managing Over-Care and Self-Neglect
Live Online 3hr CPD Workshop for Mental Health Practitioners
£69
Date TBC
This 3-hour interactive workshop supports practitioners to work effectively with clients who present as highly caring, self-sacrificing, conflict-avoidant, or unable to prioritise their own needs.
Rather than mislabelling over-giving as compliance or lack of motivation, this training introduces a psychologically informed framework that understands unmitigated communion as a threat-based protection response.
You’ll learn how guilt, fear of rejection, and relational sensitivity drive self-neglect and resistance to change. The focus is practical and clinically grounded — helping you recognise early signs of overextension, prevent burnout, and support sustainable care without triggering guilt.
What will this training give you?
• Clear understanding of over-care and self-neglect patterns
• Practical ways to reduce guilt-based resistance
• Confidence working with self-sacrificing clients
• Skills to validate care without reinforcing self-neglect
• Tools to reframe self-care as sustaining care
• A framework to differentiate healthy compassion from overextension
Learning Objectives:
• Identify unmitigated communion as a coping strategy
• Recognise key behavioural and relational indicators of over-care and boundary erosion
• Assess how guilt, attachment, and fear of rejection influence client behaviour
• Apply values-aligned communication to reduce resistance and increase engagement
• Demonstrate boundary-supportive and guilt-sensitive language in-session
• Integrate sustainability-focused approaches into clinical practice
Assessment/Evidence of Learning:
Learning is evidenced through active participation in guided reflection activities, clinical discussion, and practical exercises during this live workshop.
Participants demonstrate learning through:
• Identification of coping patterns in vignette material
• Appropriate formulation of over-care and self-neglect dynamics
• Use of values-aligned, guilt-sensitive language in role-play
• Demonstration of boundary-supportive communication skills
Participants receive a statement of attendance for 3 CPD hours.
Teaching Methods:
This training is delivered live online and uses a mix of brief expert instruction, facilitated discussion, live demonstration, and supported practice.
Participants engage in:
• Guided reflection (clinician responses to over-care)
• Clinical vignette analysis
• Structured role-play scenarios
• Boundary-setting and guilt-reframe exercises
• Reflective empathy practice
Materials provided for clinical integration.
About the Presenter:
Karen Bartle is a postgraduate in Health Psychology, Advanced Clinical Hypnotherapist, clinical supervisor, co-founder of the Academy of Advanced Changework, founder of HealthTalk Psychology, and co-author of The Advanced Hypnotherapist.
With 25+ years’ experience, Karen supports practitioners working with complex behavioural and relational patterns. She is known for translating psychological depth into practical, usable clinical skills.
Who is the course for?
Practitioners working with clients who:
• Prioritise others over themselves
• Experience guilt when self-focused
• Struggle with boundaries
• Present with burnout or depletion
• Engage in people-pleasing patterns
Especially relevant for work with caregivers, health professionals, burnout, chronic illness, and relational coping styles.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2827
Avoidant Coping - Managing Withdrawal and Low Engagement
Live Online 3hr CPD Workshop for Mental Health Professionals
£69
Date TBC
This 3-hour interactive training workshop supports compassionate mental health professionals to work more effectively with clients who appear disengaged, withdrawn, ambivalent, or unmotivated. Rather than treating avoidance as resistance or lack of effort, the workshop introduces a psychologically informed framework that understands avoidance as a threat-based protection response.
Participants will learn how perceived safety, nervous-system regulation, and relational dynamics directly shape engagement and motivation. The focus is practical, ethical, and clinically grounded — helping attendees recognise early signs of withdrawal, prevent relational ruptures, and restore engagement without pressure or confrontation.
What will this training give participants?
• A clearer understanding of why avoidance and disengagement occur in therapy
• Practical ways to reduce defensiveness and increase psychological safety in session
• Greater confidence responding to missed appointments, ambivalence, humour, or shutdown
• Skills to repair subtle relational ruptures before engagement is lost
• Tools you can apply immediately to support motivation without pushing or persuading
Teaching Methods:
This training is delivered live online and uses a mix of brief expert instruction, facilitated discussion, live demonstration, and supported practice. Participants engage in guided reflection, clinical vignette work, and practical exercises, with debriefs to consolidate learning.
Downloadable worksheets and participant reference materials are provided to support integration into clinical practice.
Assessment/Evidence of Learning:
Learning is evidenced through active participation in guided reflection activities, clinical discussion, and practical exercises during this live workshop. Engagement in skills practice demonstrates attainment of learning objectives.
Learning objectives:
Evaluate avoidance and disengagement as threat-based protective responses within a clinical context.
Identify and assess observable indicators of withdrawal and low engagement in therapy.
Demonstrate strategies that increase psychological safety and reduce client defensiveness.
Apply and evaluate techniques to respond to ambivalence and repair relational ruptures, supporting sustained engagement.
Participants receive a statement of attendance for 3 CPD hours.
About the Presenter:
Karen Bartle is a postgraduate in Health Psychology, Advanced Clinical Hypnotherapist and coach, clinical supervisor, educator, and consultant. She co-founded the Academy of Advanced Changework in 2006 and is the founder of HealthTalk Psychology - 'The psychology of patient/client change'.
For over 25 years, Karen has worked with individuals, caregivers, and health professionals navigating behavioural, lifestyle, and psychosocial challenges. She has seen first-hand how caring practitioners can feel stuck when empathy, education, coaching and even motivational interviewing can’t shift engagement — and how reframing avoidance can transform therapeutic outcomes.
Karen’s teaching style blends clinical depth with clarity and compassion. She is known for translating complex psychological concepts into language practitioners can use immediately, and for creating learning environments that feel safe, reflective, and practical.
Who is the course for?
This training is designed for compassionate mental health professionals who care deeply but feel stuck with a proportion of their clients who withdraw, shutdown, disengage, or struggle to follow through.
It is especially suited to practitioners working with anxiety, shame, overwhelm, health behaviour change, or ambivalence around change.
Places are limited to ensure an interactive, skills-focused learning experience.
 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

The Hypnotherapy Academy
(Holly Wincote)
Location: ALL COURSES ARE RUN REMOTELY BY LIVE ZOOM WORKSHOP


Your trainer Holly Wincote is a qualified trainer and therapist, for Hypnotherapy, Integral Eye Movement Therapy (IEMT) and NLP with her own busy private practice working with clients and over 30 years combined hypnotherapy and training experience. Courses are designed and delivered to encompass different learning styles which ensure they are engaging as well as enjoyable and that all delegates gain maximum benefit.
 

Ref No: 2807 
Certificate in Hypnotherapy for Pain Management (CHPM)
LIVE ZOOM WORKSHOP – 1 day course: 7 hours CPD
£150
Saturday 14 November 2026, 9.30am to 4.30pm
This one day CPD course is suitable for qualified and trainee hypnotherapists, as well as other practitioners who have experience using hypnosis. Learn the skills to help you specialise in Hypnotherapy for Pain Management and work confidently with clients in your practice. The day includes demonstrations and exercises, so you can experience the techniques taught, as well as an emailed Course Manual and Course Workbook with powerpoint slides, containing everything covered on the day plus a variety of scripts to use with your clients:-
•Different Types of Pain and Theories
•Assessment and Pain Diary
•Sensory Alterations, Sensation Replacement, Substitution and Reinterpretation
•Analgesia and Anesthesia
•Time Distortion & Displacement
•Association & Dissociation
•Paradoxical Intention
•Pain Tolerance
•Hypnotherapy Inductions and Scripts
•Phantom Limb Pain
•Example Session Formats/Therapy Plans

Cancellation Policy:

A delegate may cancel a booking no later than 10 full days before the course date and providing minimum course numbers have already been met – please contact the GHR directly and a full refund will be issued by them.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2809 
Certificate in Hypnotherapy for Trauma & PTSD (CHTP)
LIVE ZOOM WORKSHOP – 1 day course: 7 hours CPD
£150
Saturday 21 November 2026, 9.30am to 4.30pm
This one day CPD course is suitable for qualified and trainee hypnotherapists, as well as other practitioners who have experience using hypnosis. Learn the skills and techniques to help clients to work through past traumatic events calmly, in order to move forward out of the past and live effectively in the present. On this course age regression is utilised as the vehicle for addressing trauma and includes different methods so you can choose which suits your client best. Similarly, there are a number of techniques included for the resolution process. The day includes demonstrations and exercises so you can experience the methods and techniques taught, as well as scripts to use with your clients. You will also be provided by email with a Course Workbook with powerpoint slides and a detailed Course Manual containing everything covered, prior to the course:-
•What is Trauma and Effects of Trauma
•Psychobiology of Trauma
•Philosophy of Trauma & Recovery
•Assessing Trauma & Posttraumatic Outcomes
•Psychoeducation
•Distress Reduction & Affect Regulation
•Regression Methods
•Components of Trauma Processing
•Emotional Processing & Resolution Techniques
•Example Session Formats/Therapy Plans

Cancellation Policy:

A delegate may cancel a booking no later than 10 full days before the course date and providing minimum course numbers have already been met – please contact the GHR directly and a full refund will be issued by them.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2810
Certificate in Hypno Gastric Band (CHGB)
LIVE ZOOM WORKSHOP – 1 day course: 7 hours CPD
£150
Sunday 22 November 2026, 9.30am to 4.30pm
This one day CPD course is suitable for qualified and trainee hypnotherapists, as well as other practitioners who have experience using hypnosis. Learn the skills & techniques to enable you to gain further knowledge of Gastric Band Hypnosis and work confidently with clients in your practice. The day includes demonstrations & practical exercises so you can experience the techniques taught, as well as a variety of original scripts to use with your clients. You are also provided via email a detailed Course Manual and Course Workbook prior to the course:-
•About Surgical Gastric Bands
•Gastric Band Hypnosis
•Assessing Client Suitability
•Other Food Issues
•Preparing for the Procedure
•Hypnosis Gastric Band Procedure
•Effects for the Procedure
•Follow up Sessions and After-Care
•Complete timetable and content for Hypno Gastric Band Program

Cancellation Policy:

A delegate may cancel a booking no later than 10 full days before the course date and providing minimum course numbers have already been met – please contact the GHR directly and a full refund will be issued by them.

 

Book Now          Contact us
 
Ref No: 2811
Certificate in Past Life Regression (CPLR)
LIVE ZOOM WORKSHOP – 1 day course: 7 hours CPD
£150
Saturday 28 November 2026, 9.30am to 4.30pm
This one day CPD course is suitable for qualified and trainee hypnotherapists, as well as other practitioners with experience using hypnosis. Learn the skills to help you gain further knowledge about Past Life Regression and work confidently with clients. Past Life Journeys can be explored purely for interest, or to help identify and resolve issues in a previous life (or lives) which have been carried forward causing a problem in the present life. The day includes demonstrations and practical exercises to practice facilitating a PLR session and to experience a past life journey yourself if you wish. A comprehensive Course Manual and Course Workbook is provided via email prior to the course which includes everything covered on the course, along with the scripts to use with clients:-
•What is Past Life Regression & What are Past Life Memories?
•When to use PLR and what issues it can treat, including PLR for interest
•Preparation for PLR and how many Past Lives
•Different methods of Regression
•Locating source experience(s) and asking the right questions
•Recovering and releasing memories
•Dealing with Death - with emotion or without emotion
•Healing, achieving closure and Re-integration
•In-between lives
•Complete session timetable and content for therapy plan

Cancellation Policy:

A delegate may cancel a booking no later than 10 full days before the course date and providing minimum course numbers have already been met – please contact the GHR directly and a full refund will be issued by them.

 

Book Now          Contact us
 
Ref No: 2813
Certificate in Hypnotherapy for Performance Enhancement - (CHPE)
LIVE ZOOM WORKSHOP – 1 day course: 7 hours CPD
£150
Sunday 15 November 2026, 9.30am to 4.30pm
This one day CPD course is suitable for qualified and trainee hypnotherapists, as well as other practitioners with experience using hypnosis. Learn the skills to help you gain further knowledge in Hypnotherapy for Performance Enhancement and work confidently with clients. The day includes demonstrations and exercises to experience the techniques taught, as well as an emailed Course Workbook with powerpoint slides, Course Manual containing everything taught on the day, plus scripts to use with clients:-
•How Hypnotherapy can be used to Enhance Performance
•Business, Sports, Music and Academic
•The Winning Mindset
•Identifying and Removing Limiting Beliefs
•Cognitions and Behaviours
•Other Influencing Factors
•Pain, Injury and Recovery
•Hypnotherapy Inductions and Scripts
•Coaching Methods
•NLP Techniques
•Example Session Formats/Therapy Plans

Cancellation Policy:

A delegate may cancel a booking no later than 10 full days before the course date and providing minimum course numbers have already been met – please contact the GHR directly and a full refund will be issued by them.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2814
Certificate in Parts Therapy (CPT)
LIVE ZOOM WORKSHOP – 1 day course: 7 hours CPD
£150
Sunday 29 November 2026, 9.30am to 4.30pm
This one day CPD course is suitable for qualified and trainee hypnotherapists, as well as other practitioners who have experience using hypnosis, who are looking to gain a thorough understanding of Parts Therapy and use it in everyday practice. Parts Therapy is effective for helping clients resolve inner conflict which is preventing them from reaching their goals. For example, how many times have you heard clients say “Part of me wants to....but another part of me wants to....”? . Parts Therapy can be used to treat many different issues, with lasting results and is therefore a valuable addition to your toolkit and the course includes demonstrations and practical exercises. A Course Workbook with powerpoint slides and comprehensive Course Manual and are provided via email prior to the course, which includes everything covered on the course along with the scripts to use with clients:-
•What is Parts Therapy?
•Determining when to use Parts Therapy with your Clients
•Key objectives of Parts Therapy
•Spontaneous Regression
•Establishing Ideomotor Responses
•12-Step Process
•Identifying parts and discovering their purpose
•Mediating, negotiating and coming to an agreement
•Avoiding the pitfalls
•Demonstrations & Practical Exercises
•Complete structure and content for therapy plan

Cancellation Policy:

A delegate may cancel a booking no later than 10 full days before the course date and providing minimum course numbers have already been met – please contact the GHR directly and a full refund will be issued by them.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

ZOOM

 

MindWorks Therapy Training
(
Serena Bostock)
Location: Online (Zoom)


Ref No: 2787
Group Facilitation and Collaborative Working with Professionals
Date TBC, 6:30 PM - 9:30 PM (UK Time) via Zoom
£179
There is a misconception that we can DO IT ALL on our own and that one to one working is the best way to gain more clients and build your reputation within your sector.
Some therapists, coaches and other practitioners feel that the group approach is too much hard work and that all the responsibility rests on their heads.
However, large companies, corporations as well as the voluntary and statutory sectors offering services, know and understand the benefits of a collaborative way of working and the group approach and often serve their clients through these methods.
Through her career spanning over 20 years, Serena has worked with groups in youth, school, university and corporate settings; whilst collaboratively designing, creating and co-producing programmes to meet dual organisational objectives.
Serena has successfully taken this approach to her therapy business and has designed a workshop to demonstrate how you can use this approach to enhance your own practice.
In Serena's workshop ‘Group facilitation & Collaborative Working for Therapists, Coaches and Practitioners’ you will cover:
● How to properly prepare yourself to work with a group
● What collaborative working is and the benefits including examples
● Strategies & the benefits of working with clients in groups online and face to face
● What your unique knowledge and experience could offer in a group setting
● Steps to take specific action towards either, group or collaborative approach
You will also leave the session with;
● a new group therapeutic script
● a checklist to help you prepare for your client group work
● possible coaches/therapists/professionals in your contacts that you could approach to start that collaborative way of working to enhance your KNOW, LIKE and TRUST factor
● actionable steps to take to start working with your ideal group of clients
We look forward to seeing you there!

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

Yorkshire Hypnotherapy Training
Debbie Waller (Accredited QPR Instructor)

Location: Distance Learning
 

Ref No: 2759
AI in Your Practice – a Simple Guide for Therapists
£45
Why Should Therapists Learn About AI?
Whether you're wary or enthusiastic about the idea of Artificial Intelligence (AI), it's part of life and likely to remain so. It's becoming an essential tool across all areas of business, including therapy practices. If you're not a natural 'tech wizard,' don't worry – mastering AI doesn't require advanced skills. In fact, with just a little guidance, you can use AI to:
Work more efficiently.
Free up time for what matters most.
Spark new creative ideas.
Enhance client outcomes.
Expand your practice's reach.
Course Level:
This CPD-accredited course is ideal for therapists with minimal or no prior experience with AI. Through clear instructions, hands-on resources, and examples drawn from real-life scenarios, you'll be able to integrate AI into your work right away.
Accreditations: ACCPH, ICBCH
The course won't transform you into a tech expert overnight, but it will give you simple, effective ways to get started. Even if technology feels intimidating, the practical tools provided here will help you incorporate AI into your practice with ease and confidence.
The Benefits of Using AI
With this course, you'll explore practical applications of AI, such as:
Crafting prompts to achieve the outcomes you need.
Quickly generating content for blogs, websites, and social media.
Using AI to produce both text and visuals.
Saving time by simplifying administrative tasks.
Brainstorming creative ideas for sessions, client resources, and workshops.
Ethical and Legal Best Practices
AI is a powerful tool, but responsible use is essential. That's why this course includes important discussions on:
Understanding how AI learns and creates outputs.
Legal considerations, including copyright and intellectual property.
Maintaining ethical standards when using AI in your practice.
About This Course
While many AI tools are available – some designed for specific tasks like video editing or social media – this course keeps things simple. You'll focus on ChatGPT, an accessible and versatile platform that's free to use. Its human-like responses make it easy to navigate, even if you're not tech-savvy.
You'll receive detailed notes with practical exercises to reinforce your learning, along with helpful links to explore further. Each module highlights real-world examples to show exactly how AI can enhance your therapy practice.
Expect the course to take about 4 hours to complete, including consolidation activities. You can start at any time and progress at your own pace. Support is available throughout, and you'll receive a certificate upon passing the end-of-course quiz (80% or higher).

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2723
Hypnotherapy Practitioner Refresher Course
The price is £45 per module or £180 for the Complete Course option which includes all five modules. These prices will be available for a limited time only.
If you’ve had a career break, what you need from refresher training will vary depending on your circumstances. We, therefore, have put together a modular programme so you can purchase just the topics you need to boost your confidence, or the whole programme for a more comprehensive approach. Choose whatever you need to feel confident in relaunching your practice.
Individual modules can also be used as CPD for those currently in practice.
Written by Debbie Waller, an ICBCH Approved Education Provider, the course is also validated and endorsed by the ACCPH.
Each module includes comprehensive notes plus thinking points and further information to enhance your learning, video demonstration(s) of the topic(s) covered, and scripts/handouts/pro forma to adapt to your clients and way of working. Free email support is available at any time during and after completing the course.
The course has no time limit on completion and each module is assessed as follows:
a 750-1000 word article or blog on a relevant topic and
a brief report on a practice session you have carried out using one of the techniques in the module with a client or volunteer.
Modules available:

The Complete Hypnotherapy Practitioner Refresher Course £180
This option includes all five modules listed below and represents a saving over buying them individually.

Single Module: The Client Relationship. £45
How to get the right information to offer the best and most effective support to your client: building the right relationship, communication skills, effective pretalks, what information to collect, how to use that in your sessions, and effective therapy plans.

Single Module: Hypnotic inductions. £45
How to work confidently with a variety of inductions and pick the right one to suit any client. It includes trance skills – levels of trance, deepeners, recognising trance, reorientation; relaxation and inductions; eye fixation inductions; Elman inductions; confusional inductions; rapid inductions.

Single Module: Working with parts. £45
How to work confidently with parts to find new and effective coping strategies and/or reconcile internal conflict within the client’s thinking or beliefs. It includes: an overview of the origin and use of parts work, visual squash (parts reconciliation), six-step parts reframe, and troubleshooting parts work.

Single Module: Regression skills. £45
This single module shows you how to work confidently with regression and includes an overview of different psychological approaches to therapy, the development of the belief system, age regression (regression to childhood), both positive and in search of the origin of current issues, and past life regression.

Single Module: Hypnotherapy and Children. £45
How to apply best practices when working with younger children and offers some fun and interactive techniques. It includes scripts and resources, legal and ethical considerations, how children’s thinking develops, young children, older children, and engaging children in therapy.

Please note: This is a refresher course intended for those with prior training in hypnotherapy. It is not intended to qualify you to work as a hypnotherapist.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2374
Certificate in Hypno-Coaching
Distance Learning
Emailed to you £60
Would you like to:
* Offer successful therapy even when clients feel “stuck” or struggle with change?
* Motivate and empower your clients by actively engaging them in their own therapy?
* Provide better, more targeted therapy?
* Deal with a wider variety of issues?
* Improve your own confidence and communication skills?
Integrating coaching skills into your hypnotherapy practice – sometimes called ‘hypno-coaching’ - will allow you to do these things and more. The course offers a combination of reading, on-line slide shows, personal study and practical tasks. We offer phone and email support throughout and you can join our Facebook CPD group for support from other students. It is suitable for practicing hypnotherapists and hypnotherapy students who wish to supplement their current training.
Useful worksheets and hand-outs to use with your clients are included.
Completion of this course allows you to add life coaching as a speciality to your GHR practitioner’s listing.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2933
Mindfulness in Therapy
Distance Learning
£65
Mindfulness is hugely popular at present because of the health and wellness benefits it brings. It is suitable for use with clients of all kinds and can be utilised as an aid to lifestyle changes such as quitting smoking or controlling weight as well as for stress management and reduction.
This ACCPH accredited course includes 4 modules:
*the origins of mindfulness
*the growth of the secular version
*the evidence for (and against) using it in your practice
*resources to help you bring mindfulness into your practice: with individuals or groups, as a stand-alone service or integrated into what you already offer
This home study course comprises a booklet of notes and a work book which are emailed to you. The notes include practical tasks, links to further information and resources such as client worksheets, and a variety of other exercises to help consolidate your reading as you work your way through the course.
Each module is supported by a brief slide show which picks out the main points of the module and sometimes adds extra information.
You can enrol at any time and there is no completion deadline. Email support is available as required, as you work through the course.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2433
Certificate in Occupational Stress Management
Distance Learning
Emailed to you £60
Would you like to:
* understand the unique factors that contribute to high levels of stress at work?
* work with individuals and businesses to prevent work related stress and improve resilience?
* design and deliver effective seminars and workshops?
If you are reading this, you probably know about stress. Unfortunately, this is not always enough to help you deal effectively with clients suffering from occupational stress, as there are specific legal and practical issues which need to be taken into account. There are also opportunities to work with employers, either by accepting one to one referrals or by offering seminars and workshops to groups of employees at high risk from work related stress. Aimed specifically at hypnotherapists and hypnotherapy students, this course will give you the skills and knowledge you need to work confidently and expertly in this very rewarding field.
The course offers a combination of reading, on-line slide shows, personal study and practical tasks. The course includes handouts and worksheets to use with your clients and two hypnotherapy scripts suitable for clients with work related stress issues. We offer phone and email support throughout and you can join our Facebook CPD group for support from other students.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2442
Meditation Class Teacher Certification – classification meditation/home study
£80 (10% discount for GHR members)
There is a large body of evidence to show that regular use of meditation and relaxation techniques help to reduce stress and anxiety and promote a good work/life balance.
This course concentrates on the practicalities and logistics of running meditation classes; presentation skills, dealing with challenging class members, suitable class themes, planning classes and courses, advertising and so on. This means it is useful to you whether your approach to mediation is secular or spiritual. It also means you have skills which can be generalised to running other types of group.
It enables you to:
-be aware of the history and traditions of meditation
-have an understanding of how meditation can be used for stress reduction, relaxation and personal development
-be able to plan, organise and market meditation classes
-be aware of wider considerations such as insurance, ethics, health and safety
-be aware of a variety of secular or non-denominational meditative techniques
-know a variety of subjects which can be used for focused meditation classes
-be able to handle class dynamics and motivate students
(Please note - the course focuses on the practicalities of designing, organising and presenting classes. We do include some basic information but the course assumes you already have some familiarity with meditation, self-hypnosis or similar techniques. If in doubt please contact the organiser.)
Accreditation: The course is validated by the ACCPH, and registered with the CMA.
How it works:
You receive a comprehensive set of notes, and a Teacher's Handbook giving you plenty of ideas and techniques to use in classes.
You also receive a workbook which you complete as you work through the notes and submit to us for feedback when it's complete.
You submit a ‘case study’ which involves organising and running a meditation class for at least four people and lasting for at least an hour. You can hold your class face-to-face or online.
We wouldn’t feel right issuing a teaching-based certificate without seeing you teach, so we also ask for a five-minute presentation which can be completed live by Skype or Zoom or recorded and sent to us with your workbook.
You can start this home study course at any time and there is no time limit on completing it.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2646
GHR Acknowledged Certificate in Hypnotherapy Supervision
Distance Learning
£80 emailed to you, £110 printed and posted
As a therapist you almost certainly come to your clients from an established theoretical base - cognitive, analytical, integrated etc - with some evidence to show that it's sound. You would certainly not have set up in practice with no formal training, or based on your own experience of being hypnotised. So shouldn't you offer your supervisees the same quality service?
The purpose of supervision is often seen as 'offering support with clients' but it should be so much more. Good supervision supports and is relevant to therapists throughout their careers, not only in the early months and years.
It is available in both training and distance/online options, and you should have been qualified at least two years before undertaking it.
This distance/online version is supported by slideshows, practical activities for you to carry out to consolidate your learning, and a workbook which you return to us for feedback. While you are working through the course, your tutor can be phoned or emailed for advice at any point. You can also join our Facebook CPD support group where you can post questions, observations or comments, and discuss the course with others who are taking it, or who have already completed it.
It is suitable whether you wish to improve your service to existing supervisees or to begin offering supervision services, and will enable you to:
* be familiar with the historical reasons for the growth of clinical supervision
* be familiar with the evidence supporting the use of clinical supervision
* understand the differences between training, supervision and therapy
* be confident using three different theoretical models for supervision, and to understand the strengths and weaknesses of each
* understand the legal and ethical issues involved in supervision
* be aware of health and emotional issues which might affect your supervisee's ability to work effectively with clients
* understand the differences between supervising individuals and groups
* be aware of how groups develop over time and how you can use this to improve your group supervision sessions
* be able to draw on a wide variety of supervision activities for both groups and individuals
£95 emailed to you, £110 printed and posted.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: FREE

Making your therapy practice Autism Friendly
Free course emailed to you on request
Autism is defined by the National Autistic Society as 'a lifelong developmental disability that affects how a person communicates with and relates to other people, and how they experience the world around them'. Around 700,000 people in the UK may be autistic, or more than 1% of the population, so it's quite likely that some of the clients who present to your practice are on the autistic spectrum. You may not necessarily be working with them for issues directly connected to their autism, but the condition is inevitably part of how they respond to the world. By understanding it - and them - more fully, you can make the experience of therapy as positive and easy as possible.
This course is written by a mother and daughter team. Debbie Waller is an experienced therapist, writer and trainer. Rachel Waller, also an experienced author, is on the Autistic spectrum herself. They have put together this course for therapists and others who provide services to those with ASD (Autistic Spectrum Disorders) to help you understand the challenges they face, and to provide them with the support they need.
The course covers:
*What is autism?
*The triad of impairments
*Wider aspects of autism
*How autism affects daily life
*Tips for making your practice autism friendly

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

ONLINE

 

Hypnotic Outcomes
Damian Hamill – therapist, trainer and GDPR expert
Location: Online

Ref No: 2766
The GDPR for Therapy Professionals
Online training (study in your own time, whenever you want).
Approximately 12 hours
£120
About this course:
Confused about what the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) means for you as a therapist or therapy business owner? This course will help.
Therapists and complementary practitioners are required to comply with the GDPR in how they handle personal information. Many therapists find the requirements overwhelming and they are left bewildered and worried. This course clears away the confusion and shows you how to run a GDPR compliant practice.
As well as being an experienced therapist, Damian Hamill spent eight years working for the UK’s GDPR regulator, the Information Commissioner’s Office (ICO). During that time, Damian provided direct advice on the GDPR and associated data protection legislation to approximately 15,000 individuals and organisations.
Designed specifically to meet the needs of therapists and those running therapy businesses, this course systematically builds your knowledge and understanding of the GDPR and shows you how to implement it into your practice.
Amongst the areas covered are:
•What the GDPR is all about and why it is important
•The different pieces of UK data protection law
•The Principles of the GDPR
•Key terms & definitions in data protection
•How to provide Privacy Information
•How to decide on your Lawful Basis
•The benefits and potential pitfalls of relying on consent to use personal data
•What a Legitimate Interest is and when it justifies you using personal information
•How to lawfully handle Special Category & Criminal Offence data
•How to respond to individual rights requests
•How to engage Data Processors lawfully
•How to comply with the legislation when transferring personal data outside the UK
•How to keep personal data secure
•When and how you can lawfully share personal data with others
•and much more.
The course is delivered in your own time and at your own pace through a professional online training portal. Damian demystifies the GDPR and explains clearly, with examples relevant to those in the therapy profession, what the legislation is all about and what is requires you to do.
The content is presented in text, illustrated with clear, colourful graphics and audio is embedded in the course should this be your preferred learning style.
Who is this course suitable for?
This course is ideal for complementary therapists or practitioners in any field, and those running a therapy business or clinic. It assumes no previous knowledge of the GDPR or other data protection legislation.
Amongst those who will benefit from this course are:
•Acupuncturists
•Alexander technique teachers
•Aromatherapists
•Art therapists
•Beauticians & cosmetic therapists
•Bowen therapists
•Chiropractors
•Coaches
•Counsellors
•Cranial osteopaths
•Craniosacral therapists
•Dieticians
•Doulas
•EMDR therapists
•Energy healers
•Fitness trainers
•Herbalists
•Homeopaths
•Hypnobirthing practitioners
•Hypnotherapists
•IEMT Practitioners
•Kinesiologists
•Massage practitioners
•Naturopaths
•NLP therapists
•Nutritionists & nutritional therapists
•Osteopaths
•Personal trainers
•Pesso Boyden therapists
•Physiotherapists
•Psychotherapists
•Reiki practitioners
•Reflexologists
•Shiatsu practitioners
•Sports therapists
•Yoga teachers
and practitioners or teachers of any other form of complementary therapy or healing.
Do I receive a certificate?
Successful completion of the course leads to the award of a Certificate as evidence of your learning.
Please note – all countries regulated by the GDPR also have their own complementary legislation covering areas where the GDPR allows sovereign discretion on certain data protection matters. In the UK, this is the Data Protection Act 2018 (DPA2018). This course covers the GDPR and the DPA2018. Consequently, it will be most relevant to therapists practicing in the UK. If you are located elsewhere, the content on the GDPR will still be relevant, but your complementary national legislation will not be covered.


Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

 

 

Jennie and Kasper Kitching Advanced Hypnosis Therapy & Training
(Jennie Kitching)
Location: Online


Ref No: 2728
The Advanced Diploma In Hypnotherapy
£1,500

Online
Stand out from the rest. There are Less than 100 Advanced Hypnotherapists worldwide (83 at last count).
We're one of the Schools dedicated to help you join them.
It is so wonderful being a Qualified Hypnotherapist and helping others, though:
Do you want to RECEIVE hypnotherapy from the most Advanced Practitioners in the Profession today?
Do you miss the support of likeminded therapists learning and practising together?
Do you want to again enjoy exchanging skills and practising advanced therapeutic techniques?
Would you like to ask questions again and have a safe space to test out those advanced hypnotic phenomena and revitalise all those amazing rapids and deep state lifechanging interventions?
Do you want to be up to date on all the latest clinical trials and be fascinated and absorbed in the power of hypnosis adding NLP advanced practices and Microexpressions too?
Do you want to BECOME an Advanced Practitioner, taking your skills to the highest level?
Reviews:
Tracey Jones
Advanced Course Graduate
During the Advanced, I saw a tricky weight control client. She came across as feeling some guilt at the amount of time she spent at the gym, telling me that her husband complained that there was no family time. She made it clear however that she was unwilling to reduce her exercise, as this was her time, doing something she enjoyed.
The Advanced made me realise that this is not about weight control, but about 'me time' and I would have completely missed this if I had not been on the Advanced.
Anna Taylor
Advanced Course Graduate
The Advanced training has benefited me enormously as I now use metaphor tactfully in order to influence the client's thinking in a positive manner.
I will now be more confident in tackling situations where a client might feel under pressure if I were to directly approach something.
I am good now at opening up clients' thinking whilst ensuring their comfort.
Paula Gair
Advanced Course Graduate
I never knew the value of using Past Life Regression as a therapy for a client suffering so much. I would not have had a clue how to help him otherwise.
His significant event in the first life was the death of his grandfather when he was 16. I was quite chuffed with my decision to send his current self to go to his past life self and be there for him and say anything that the 16 year old needed. Definitely a good grief counselling technique to use for the future.
How does it work?
The course is comprised of 6 workbooks, with 30 questions in total to answer. These questions vary in style and require short or complex answers. You will have more than enough information at your fingertips to enable you to answer each of these questions, and will receive weekly video-call tutoring for any advice and support you need. The programme is self paced over 12 months.
​After applying to the course, we will send you the first workbook. We advise and comment on each answer as you send it to us, providing you with articles, example answers and material to help you. If multiple people are currently taking part in the Advanced, then you will be invited to join group study and support calls, though these are entirely optional.
​You are required to keep a journal of your progress. An in-depth explanation of the course will be given upon application or request.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

InsideOut Wellness Academy
(Michelle & Rachael)
Location: Online
 

Ref No: 2721
Private Practice Essentials
Online course, study at your own pace
You will receive access once payment has been made
£111
Gain essential skills in marketing, client attraction and the mindset required to be successful in private practice. This program empowers you with practical strategies and exercises to build a successful, sustainable practice. Ideal for wellness professionals ready to start or grow their own practice.
What You Will Learn:
Module 1: We share the exact method you need to put in place to attract your ideal client, who is willing to pay a premium to work with you.
Module 2: Learn how to effortlessly convey what your business does using effective language patterns. Once you master this skill you will start to attract clients without really trying!
Module 3: When you can market your business in a way that is aligned to who you are it becomes so easy. With this valuable skill you won't need to struggle again.
Module 4: We will show you how your mindset is getting in the way of your success and exactly how to adopt the mindset of a super successful business owner.
This course is accompanied by a workbook which will help you develop your business and marketing plan. A CPD certificate is available upon completion of the course.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

Will Thomas Coaching

(Will Thomas)
Location: Distance Learning

 

Trauma-informed Practice Certification - What is Trauma? How does it show up in raw and adaptive ways in clients? Novel trauma treatment processes. Get certificated in Trauma-informed Practice. How to integrate evidence-based novel approaches into your hypnotherapy or coaching work with clients. Multimedia, self-study option or supported-accredited option available. 

https://willthomascoaching.com/pages/trauma-informed-practice-ghr 

 

The Perfectly Wonky Life Personal Growth Course – Supporting you from surviving to thriving -  If your life has not followed the path society ‘expected’ through choice or happenstance, this is the course for you! A light and deep programme of fabulous ways to re-think and re-feel  your life, after change and adversity. Find you again.

https://willthomascoaching.com/products/ghr-perfectwonkylife

 

EFT Tapping

A Revolution in therapy. Reduce Anxiety and Tame Overthinking. Why be interested? Bring your mind and body to a stiller more peaceful place. This ground-breaking course teaches you the evidence-based approach of EFT Tapping in about 2 hours. Emotional Freedom Techniques are a set of simple, effective ways to manage emotions, reduce pain, dial-down cravings, and improve performance. With over 150+ quality research papers, showing it's effectiveness, and featured in the media, EFT Tapping is the newest and one of the most effective ways to help you to change unhealthy patterns of thought and feelings. This approach can be used within the context of hypnosis sessions, stand alone and also taught to clients for self-help. It is a great ‘state management’ tool for therapists too. The course is multimedia, carefully structured and quick and easy to learn from. Access from your phone or laptop and be up and running with these techniques in a couple of hours. The approaches in EFT are highly trauma-informed.

https://willthomascoaching.com/products/eft-tapping-ghr

 

 

 

The Holistic and Wellness Course Academy
(Sally Garozzo)
Location: Online, Self Paced
 

Ref No: 2663
Menopause Wellbeing Practitioner Diploma
Online, Self Paced
£127
If you support women of a certain age in your business, this course is a must. Menopause is no longer a silent taboo as women are demanding more and more ways to get support during their transition. Hypnotherapy and coaching is one of those ways.
You will learn about:
•What is menopause and who experiences it.
•Hormone changes that occur during menopause.
•Symptoms of menopause.
•Testing for menopause.
•Oestrogen dominance and how to avoid it.
•Why stress reduction matters so much during menopause.
•The impact of menopause on our main organs.
•The four levels of healing through menopause
•HRT - Sleep - Rest - Nutrition - Exercise - The Deep Work
•How to support our clients through menopause.
•The cultural impacts of menopause
•How to run Menopause Solution Sessions
This course has been written by a Clinical Hypnotherapist who niches in menopause. Gain 10 hours of CPD points with this accredited and insurable online course. Includes 121 WhatsApp support and community support throughout the course. The course is delivered via video and written content inside the Kajabi app.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

Hypnotherapy & Holistic Health
(Ann Bowditch)
Location: Distance Learning


Ref No: 2661
Hypnotherapy CPD for Depression CPD: 10 Hours
Distance Learning
£145
I’ve been helping depression sufferers for well over a decade and have had great success. Sometimes the shift in a client, often in a session or two, has surprised even me. I am passionate about helping depression sufferers because we can offer a healthy option that works. This is a comprehensive course and includes great insight into helping those suffering depression along with my ‘special’ technique that helps to open up those positive pathways.
This course provides valuable insight into how I work with my clients. Hypnotherapy (including some extra techniques contained here) is a great tool for helping people work through depression and live a good life.
Depression is a very broad subject, partly because there are a plethora of reasons why someone might suffer. The most likely reasons are explained in this course along with some of the knowledge that is helpful for a therapist of any type to know. This is such a big subject and it’s so important to understand it if you are going to work with sufferers. When you witness the change in them, you will find the work so rewarding.
6 Scripts including 2 metaphorical depression scripts
Introduction
What is depression in a nutshell
Symptoms
What type of person suffers depression
What causes depression
Types of depression
Insight into medication
Dealing with that first client session
Underlying beliefs
Preparing your client for hypnotherapy
Regression
My special technique
Dealing with future sessions including guilt/shame, grief, people pleasers, problem solving, secondary gains, seeking client feedback
Treatment for depression including:
•Inner voice
•Visualisation
•Switching state
•Anchors
•Catastrophising and Generalisations
•Mindfulness and Meditation
•Breathing and well-being techniques
•Time to speak up
•Reframing
6 scripts
Assignment
 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 


Oxford School of Hypnotherapy
(Reena Biswas)
Location: Online
 


Notes
1. All the CPD courses are offered in online format, The course material is comprehensive, with an assignment at the end of the notes. There is no accompanying webinar or video.
2. The time allowed for completion of each CPD course is one year, including submission of the assignment, in order to receive an e-certificate. The exception is the Advanced Diploma in Hypnotherapy for which the maximum duration for completion is eighteen months.
3. Please enrol on a course only if it has not already been covered in your practitioner level course. There is no refund for an online course, as the notes remain on the hard drive of your computer and can be accessed at any time.
4. Email support is available for the duration of each course and three months after completion.

5. Reena has over 25 years' experience as a practising clinical hypnotherapist and over 15 years as a hypnotherapy trainer.

Ref No: 2708
Mindful Hypnotherapy
£160
10 hours CPD
Hypnotherapy is an excellent adjunctive therapy. Mindfulness-based hypnotherapy helps to reinforce the benefits of mindfulness; quietens and clarifies the mind; helps focus attention and in doing so makes mindfulness-practice via self-hypnosis more powerful and effective.
With the advantage of being time-effective and easy to use, this could be a valuable option for treating anxiety and stress associated with a range of issues.
This CPD course is suitable for qualified hypnotherapists. Prior knowledge of mindfulness practice is not required.
Topics covered:
•Meaning of mindfulness
•Origin and history of mindfulness
•Benefits of mindfulness practice
•Mindfulness practice in the West
•Attitude and qualities required for mindfulness practice
•Cultivating mindfulness
•Connection between mindfulness and hypnosis
•Strengths and advantages of hypnosis that facilitate integration
•Research information
•Framework for an integrated model of mindful hypnotherapy: 8-week mindful-hypnotherapy treatment protocol
•Mindful hypnotherapy for elderly clients
•Applications of mindful hypnotherapy: stress, anxiety, depression (non-clinical), chronic pain, weight management, sleep
•Scripts
•Case studies
•Assignment

 

Book Now          Contact us


Ref No: 2660
Cognitive Hypnotherapy for OCD
Online
£140
CPD hours: 8.5
Cognitive hypnotherapy integrates Cognitive Behavioural Therapy (CBT) and Hypnotherapy, making it a powerful and highly effective intervention for a range of emotional disorders, including OCD.
The aim of this CPD course is to augment the knowledge-base of hypnotherapists and cognitive behavioural therapists familiar with applied hypnosis.
Topics covered:
• History and development of CBT
• The fundamentals of CBT
• The ABC Model
• Recognising faulty thinking
• Developing more healthy and positive ways of thinking patterns
• Goal-directed thinking
• Defining Problems and Setting Goals
• Exploring emotions
• Defining emotional problems
• Identifying solutions and behaviours that maintain problems
• Setting goals in relation to current problems
• Integration of CBT and Hypnotherapy
• Strengths and advantages of hypnosis that facilitate integration
• Framework for an integrated model of cognitive hypnotherapy
• Application: Overcoming obsessions - understanding obsessions, preoccupations and compulsions; understanding OCD; recognising health anxiety; identifying unhelpful behaviours; trusting your judgement; facing your fears
• Scripts
• Assignment

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2661
Cognitive Hypnotherapy for Anxiety and Panic Attacks
Online
£140
CPD hours: 8.5
Cognitive hypnotherapy integrates Cognitive Behavioural Therapy (CBT) and Hypnotherapy, making it a powerful and highly effective intervention for a range of emotional disorders, including anxiety and panic attacks.
This CPD course is aimed at hypnotherapists and cognitive behavioural therapists familiar with applied hypnosis.
Topics covered:
• History and development of CBT
• The fundamentals of CBT
• The ABC Model
• Recognising faulty thinking
• Developing more healthy and positive ways of thinking patterns
• Goal-directed thinking
• Defining Problems and Setting Goals
• Exploring emotions
• Defining emotional problems
• Identifying solutions and behaviours that maintain problems
• Setting goals in relation to current problems
• Integration of CBT and Hypnotherapy
• Strengths and advantages of hypnosis that facilitate integration
• Framework for an integrated model of cognitive hypnotherapy
• Application: Anxiety and panic attacks - low frustration tolerance (LFT); thought monitoring form; understanding anxiety; state and trait anxiety, anxiety disorders, free-floating anxiety; Socratic questioning; panic attacks
• Scripts and inductions
• Assignment

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2662
Cognitive Hypnotherapy
Online
£160
CPD hours: 10
Cognitive hypnotherapy integrates Cognitive Behavioural Therapy (CBT) and Hypnotherapy, making it a powerful and highly effective intervention for a range of emotional disorders.
This CPD course is suitable for qualified hypnotherapists and other professional therapists qualified in applied hypnosis, who may wish to include this integrated approach in their practice.
Topics covered:
• History and development of CBT
• The fundamentals of CBT
• The ABC Model
• Recognising faulty thinking
• Developing more healthy and positive ways of thinking patterns
• Goal-directed thinking
• Defining Problems and Setting Goals
• Exploring emotions
• Defining emotional problems
• Identifying solutions
• Setting goals in relation to current problems
• Understanding Low Frustration Tolerance (LFT)
• Challenging that create LFT
• Defining Problems and Setting Goals
• Integration of CBT and Hypnotherapy
• Perceived barriers to the integration of CBT and therapeutic hypnosis
• Strengths and advantages of hypnosis that facilitate integration
• Framework for an integrated model of cognitive hypnotherapy
• Applications: Anxiety and anger; overcoming obsessions; improving self-esteem; psychosexual disorders (ED & Vaginismus)

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2663
Conversational Hypnosis
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
Conversational hypnosis, sometimes referred to as "covert" hypnosis or hypnosis without trance aims to elicit change in the subject's behaviour without the latter going through a formal trance induction. Since the communication takes place in a conversational manner, the technique, similar to indirect hypnosis, is called "conversational" hypnosis.
This technique is particularly useful for managing pain and anxiety, and is sometimes used by dentists. It can also be employed by sports coaches when working with athletes and sportsmen and women. In non-therapeutic settings, examples of conversational or covert hypnosis can be found in TV commercials and other forms of marketing.
Conversational hypnosis can also be used as a self-hypnosis technique.
Topics covered:
• Definition
• Conversational self-hypnosis
• Benefits of conversational hypnosis
• Examples from non-therapeutic settings
• The technique
• Applications - management of pain and anxiety; sports coaching
• Inductions and scripts
• Research into conversational hypnosis
• Waking hypnosis
• Assignment

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2664
Hypno-coaching for Fertility
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
Reproductive challenges and fertility problems can have their origin in a number of issues including physical, emotional and psychological imbalance. The consequences can be stressful and distressing.
Hypno-coaching is a combination of hypnosis and coaching, working at the subconscious and conscious levels of the client’s mind, making it a highly effective therapeutic modality applied in conjunction with medical intervention.
This course is aimed at practising hypnotherapists, life coaches and other therapists who wish to adopt a mind-body approach to address the problem of infertility.
Topics covered:
• Meaning and causes of infertility
• Psychological impact of infertility
• The hypno-coaching model
• Goal-setting
• Identifying problems and issues
• Effective use of imagery
• Psychological preparation for pregnancy
• Assignment

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2665
Hypnotherapy for Cancer Patients
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
There is growing evidence that hypnotherapy is proving to be an effective adjunctive therapeutic modality in the overall care of cancer patients. This is particularly relevant for issues such as anxiety, confidence, problems with eating and sleeping.
The aim of the workshop is to give the practising hypnotherapist sufficient understanding of the psychological and physical symptoms and the role played by emotions in order to be able to apply hypnotherapy to improve the individual’s quality of life.
Topics covered:
• Research into the application of hypnotherapy for certain types of cancers
• The mind-body connection
• Assessing the individual’s needs and commencing therapeutic intervention
• Teaching the individual self-hypnosis to continue the self-care process
• Applications
• Case study
• Scripts
• Assignment
Note: This CPD course does not address the illness (that is the domain of conventional medicine); its aim is to help the individual with the psychological issues arising from the disease.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2666
Hypno-Coaching
Online
£160
CPD hours: 10
Hypno-coaching is a combination of the disciplines of hypnosis and life-coaching. Working at both the conscious and subconscious levels, hypno-coaching utilises the deep penetrating power of hypnosis along with the traditional principles of coaching to accelerate the process of goal-achievement, and to create deep, long-lasting positive change.
The aim of the course is to equip the therapist with sufficient knowledge, principles and techniques of life coaching to enable her or him to work confidently with clients on issues including career, relationships, goal-setting and achieving desired outcomes in their personal and professional lives.
Topics covered:
• What is life coaching
• The GROW model
• Structure of a hypno-coaching session
• The Hypno-coaching procedure within the framework of the NOS (National Occupational Standards) for Hypnotherapy, UK
• Educating the client to adopt self-care procedures
• The Wheel of Life in the context of the GROW model
• Applications: weight management, relationships, career

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2667
Hypno-birthing
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
Hypnosis can be a valuable tool throughout the entire course of pregnancy, particularly during labour and delivery. A considerable body of scientific research evidence supports this view, and today, several techniques are used, with the same ultimate effect.
The aim of this course is to broaden the knowledge and skill base of practising hypnotherapists, who can guide clients through the process before, during and after labour, if they opt for hypno-birthing, working in conjunction with a qualified health-care provider.
Topics covered:
• The role of endorphins
• Origin of hypno-birthing
• The role played by fear
• Using hypnosis to prepare the mind and body
• Breathing techniques
• Relaxation techniques
• Visualisation
• Hypnosis before, during and after labour
• Hypno-birthing sessions
• The Bradley Method
• Oster’s Model
• Sauer’s Brief Model
• Assignment

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2668
Hypno-Coaching for Cancer Patients
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
Hypno-coaching is a combination of the disciplines of hypnosis and life-coaching. Working at both the conscious and subconscious levels, hypno-coaching utilises the deep penetrating power of hypnosis along with the traditional principles of coaching to accelerate the process of goal-achievement, and to create deep, long-lasting positive change.
The aim of this course is to provide practising hypnotherapists, already working with, or aiming to work with cancer patients, with the knowledge and skills necessary to deal with the challenges and issues faced by these individuals.
Topics covered:
• What is life coaching
• Goals
• The GROW Model
• Structure of a hypno-coaching session
• The hypno-coaching procedure
• Educating the client to adopt self-care procedures
• Applications: change of lifestyle and occupation following diagnosis; self-image; relationships; confidence
Note: The Hypno-coaching intervention does not address the disease itself, but the lifestyle issues that result from the illness.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2669
Hypno-coaching for Fertility
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
Reproductive challenges and fertility problems can have their origin in a number of issues including physical, emotional and psychological imbalance. The consequences can be stressful and distressing.
Hypno-coaching is a combination of hypnosis and coaching, working at the subconscious and conscious levels of the client’s mind, making it a highly effective therapeutic modality applied in conjunction with medical intervention.
This course is aimed at practising hypnotherapists, life coaches and other therapists who wish to adopt a mind-body approach to address the problem of infertility.
Topics covered:
• Meaning and causes of infertility
• Psychological impact of infertility
• The hypno-coaching model
• Goal-setting
• Identifying problems and issues
• Effective use of imagery
• Psychological preparation for pregnancy

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2670
Hypno-coaching for Psychosexual Disorders
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
Hypno-coaching is a combination of the disciplines of hypnosis and life coaching.
Working at both the conscious and subconscious levels, hypno-coaching utilises the deep penetrating power of hypnosis along with the traditional principles of coaching to accelerate the process of goal-achievement, and to create deep, long-lasting positive change
Sex, the most intimate and one of the most pleasurable of human experiences, can sometimes be fraught with problems. Medical intervention may address the issue and resolve it. However, if the problem is psychological, hypno-coaching may be utilised as an adjunctive therapeutic modality.
The aim of this course is to broaden the knowledge and skill base of the practising hypnotherapist, who can address such issues when working with clients faced with these problems.
Topics Covered
• What is life coaching
• The GROW model
• Requirements of the National Occupational Standards for Hypnotherapy
• Understanding the sexual personality
• Structure of a hypno-coaching session
• Addressing psychosexual issues through hypno-coaching:
- Erectile dysfunction
- Early ejaculation
- Delayed ejaculation
- General performance anxiety
- Low or no sexual desire in men and women
- Difficulty with lubrication
- Inorgasmia
- Vaginismus

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2671
Hypno-coaching for Weight Management
Online
£160
CPD hours: 10
Hypno-coaching is a combination of the disciplines of hypnosis and life-coaching. Working at both the conscious and subconscious levels, hypno-coaching utilises the deep penetrating power of hypnosis along with the traditional principles of coaching to accelerate the process of goal-achievement, and to create deep, long-lasting positive change.
Obesity can often be the symptom of a range of complex issues. Consequently, therapy for weight loss and/or management is often less than straightforward.
The aim of the course is to equip the therapist with sufficient knowledge of the principles and techniques of life coaching and applied hypnosis to enable her or him to work confidently with clients on the complex issue of weight loss and weight management.
Topics covered:
• Introduction to life skills coaching
• The GROW model
• Integration of coaching and hypnotherapy
• Reasons for overeating
• Exploring the client's relationship with food
• Application of the GROW model
• Visualisation
• The Swish technique
• Teaching the client self-hypnosis
• Scripts
• Case studies
• Understanding food labels
• Understanding calories, and tips for a healthy lifestyle
• Alcohol consumption - calories in alcohol
• Risks of drinking excessively
• Assignment

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2672
Hypnosis-based ACT
Online
£160
CPD hours: 10
Acceptance and Commitment Therapy (ACT) is a well-researched, scientific approach which enables individuals to perceive their problems in a new way, rather than trying to avoid or challenge them. Based on the principles of mindfulness, cognitive defusion and acceptance, the efficacy of ACT can be further enhanced by integrating it with hypnotherapy.
This comprehensive CPD course explains the core concepts of ACT and illustrates its integration with hypnosis to provide a powerful, deep and long-lasting beneficial change rather than simply teaching the client how to ignore or challenge their problems and issues.
The course is suitable for qualified hypnotherapists and other therapists experience in applied hypnosis.
Topics covered:
• Definition and meaning of ACT
• Research into the effectiveness of ACT
• Origin
• Core concepts
• Explanation of core concepts with examples
• Role of hypnosis in enhancing effectiveness of ACT
• Integration of hypnosis with ACT
• Applications: anxiety, stress, depression, chronic conditions (pain)
• Scripts
• Case study
• Assignment

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2673

Hypnosis for Past Life Regression
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
Past life regression may be described as a technique that uses hypnosis to recover what practitioners believe to be "memories" of past lives or incarnations, though others may regard them as fantasies. The concept of past life regression and its use as a therapy is controversial. However, it is important to remember that the therapist should keep an open mind about this and not allow his personal beliefs to colour his judgement. If a client specifically requests past life regression therapy, this CPD course will give the practising hypnotherapist the necessary skill to offer this specialisation.
Topics covered:
• Research into past life regression
• Personal beliefs
• Techniques of past life recall
• Hypnosis and past life regression
• Danger of false memories
• Stages of a hypnotherapy protocol for past life regression
• Scripts
• Case study
• Abreaction
• Assignment

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2674
Hypnotherapy for Asthma
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
Asthma attacks all age groups but often starts in childhood. It is a disease characterised by recurrent attacks of breathlessness and wheezing, which vary in severity and frequency from person to person. In an individual, they may occur from hour to hour and day to day.
Research has shown that hypnotherapy, in conjunction with conventional treatment, can help an asthma sufferer by teaching them relaxation and breathing techniques and ways of alleviating anxiety which often triggers an attack, as well being a symptom of an attack.
This CPD course is suitable for qualified hypnotherapists and NLP practitioners and other therapists conversant with applied hypnosis.
Topics covered:
• Causes and symptoms of asthma
• Conventional treatment
• Research information on hypnotherapy for asthma
• The Asthma-Hay fever connection: research on application of self-hypnosis
• Hypnotherapy treatment for asthma
• Physical and mental relaxation
• Breathing techniques
• Importance of self-hypnosis practice by client
• Case studies
• Scripts
• Assignment

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2675
Hypnotherapy for Addictions
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
A person is said to be addicted when a habit or substance makes normal life difficult or impossible, and the individual has little or no control over doing, taking or using something, to the point where it could be harmful to them.
Hypnotherapy can address the problem of addiction as a mental health issue, and can be a useful adjunct to other therapeutic intervention, including medical and psychological approaches.
This CPD course aims to enable qualified hypnotherapists and other therapists conversant with applied hypnosis to help patients and clients address emotional and psychological effects resulting from addiction. The addictions addressed are substance abuse and gambling.
It is important to note that the hypnotherapeutic approach does not purport to "cure" the addiction, and no such claims should be made.
Topics covered:
• Definition of addiction
• Addictive behaviour
• Addictive personality
• Analysis of the habit
• Research information on hypnotherapy for addiction
• Goal setting
• Changing mental approach towards the addiction
• Motivation
• Visualisation
• The Swish technique
• Change self-image and improve self-esteem
• Teaching self-hypnosis
• Applications - substance abuse, gambling
• Scripts
• Case studies

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2676
Hypnotherapy for Anxiety
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
Anxiety is an emotion characterised by inner turmoil, feelings of tension and worry which can originate from a number of physical, emotional or psychological issues. It can disrupt normal life and can reach a point where the person may feel unable and powerless to control these unwanted thoughts and feelings.
Hypnotherapy can be an effective adjunct in the treatment of anxiety disorders, by giving the individual a set of tools and techniques which can give them back control over their unwanted emotions.
This CPD course is suitable for qualified/practising hypnotherapists and other therapists conversant with applied hypnosis.
Topics covered:
• Definition of anxiety
• Types of anxiety disorders - Generalised Anxiety Disorder, Free-floating Anxiety, Social Anxiety Disorder
• Causes and symptoms
• Exposure Therapy for anxiety disorders
• Mindfulness practice for addressing anxiety
• Hypnotherapy for anxiety
• Breathing techniques
• Physical and mental relaxation
• Visualisation
• Behavioural techniques for controlling thoughts and emotions
• Scripts
• Case studies
• Assignment

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2677
Hypnotherapy for Phobias
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
A phobia is an extreme form of fear; one which often defies logical explanation. The range of emotions accompanying a phobia can be annoying to life-disrupting.
Hypnotherapy, sometimes accompanied by other therapeutic interventions, can be effective in addressing a range of phobic responses.
This CPD course is suitable for qualified/practising hypnotherapists and other therapists conversant with applied hypnosis.
Topics covered:
• Definition of a phobia
• Causes
• Common types of phobia
• Symptoms
• Treatment protocols - exposure therapy, systematic desensitisation
• Hypnotherapy for phobia - systematic desensitisation under hypnosis
• Hypnotherapy/NLP - the Fast Phobia Cure
• Physical and mental relaxation
• Breathing techniques
• Visualisation
• Behavioural techniques of controlling thoughts and emotions
• Scripts
• Case studies
• Assignment

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2678
Hypnotherapy for Children
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
Hypnotherapy for children can be highly effective, and a rewarding experience if the therapist is able to understand and work with the natural curiosity and lively imagination children have, and adapt the therapy accordingly.
This CPD course is suitable for practising hypnotherapists who wish to work with children, addressing a range of issues, and for those therapists experienced in applied hypnosis who wish to explore this area of work.
Topics covered:
• Special considerations for hypnotherapeutic intervention with children
• Hypnotic susceptibility in children
• Storytelling with children – establishing the professional relationship
• Induction
• Deepening
• Therapeutic suggestions - dealing with negative feelings and ego-strengthening
• Posthypnotic suggestions
• Self-hypnosis
• Applications: anxiety, asthma, bedwetting (nocturnal enuresis), eczema, pain management

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2679
Hypnotherapy for Pain Management
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
Research suggests that hypnosis has played some part in alleviating pain for well over a century. In many instances the client or patient is taught self or auto-hypnosis by the therapist in order to manage the pain, after a few initial sessions of hetero-hypnosis. This enables the individual to have more control over his or her life and also saves time and money, particularly if the pain is chronic
Pain can be beneficial and harmful at the same time. The role of hypnosis is to control and manage pain the cause of which is known and the pain is not the subject of medical intervention.
This CPD course is aimed at practising hypnotherapists and other therapists experienced in applied hypnosis, wishing to add this specialisation to their repertoire.
Topics covered:
• Nature and types of pain
• Research into the application of hypnotherapy for pain relief
• Factors relevant to pain-management through hypnotherapy
• Strategies for alleviating pain through hypnotherapy
• Specific applications - pain associated with dentistry, obstetrics, surgery, old sports injury
• Scripts
• Case study
• Assignment

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2680
Hypnotherapy for Psychosexual Disorders
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
Sex, the most intimate and one of the most pleasurable of human experiences, can sometimes be fraught with problems. Medical intervention may address the issue and resolve it. However, if the problem is psychological, hypnotherapy may be utilised as an adjunctive therapeutic modality.
The aim of this course is to broaden the knowledge and skill base of practising hypnotherapists, who can address such issues when working with clients faced with these problems.
Topics covered:
• Understanding the sexual personality – sexual profiling
• The role of suggestibility
• Self-hypnosis and sex – how self-hypnosis can help or hinder
• Teaching the client self-hypnosis
• Addressing sexual problems with self-hypnosis once the cause has been established
- Erectile dysfunction
- General performance anxiety
- Early ejaculation
- Delayed ejaculation
- Difficulty with lubrication
- Inorgasmia
- Vaginismus

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2681
Hypnotic Surgery for Weight Loss
Online
£160
CPD hours: 10
Obesity is increasingly becoming a serious problem globally, and in the West in particular. Eventually, this major problem will take its toll on the healthcare infrastructure.
The hypnotic gastric band surgery, hypnotic/virtual gastric bypass surgery and the hypnotic gastric sleeve surgery are weight loss systems that can be applied to those individuals who are deemed medically suitable for these surgical procedures, but who are unwilling or unable to undergo the operation due to other factors.
The emphasis is on the virtual gastric band and the virtual bypass procedures, although other therapeutic techniques for weight loss are included.
The course is suitable for those hypnotherapists who wish to specialise in this field and for other therapists qualified in applied hypnosis.
Topics covered:
• Explanation of the gastric band procedure
• Explanation of the gastric bypass procedure
• Explanation of the gastric sleeve surgery
• Understanding the client’s relationship with food
• Importance of a healthy lifestyle
• Gaining insight into the client’s thoughts, beliefs and attitudes
• Addressing issues related to obesity using a combination of therapeutic techniques
• The hypnotic/virtual gastric band surgery
• The hypnotic/virtual gastric bypass surgery
• Follow-up

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2682
Parts Therapy for Inner Change
Online
£180
CPD hours: 12
Parts therapy is an intervention that entails identifying and communicating directly with the different ‘parts’ of the subconscious mind with the aim of enabling the client to achieve a desired goal.
Parts therapy can be easily integrated into the hypnotherapeutic protocol as the trance state facilitates communication with the different parts while the risk of interference from the analytical conscious mind is reduced.
This CPD course is suitable for qualified and practising hypnotherapists and for other therapists experienced in applied hypnosis.
Topics covered:
• Definition and brief history of parts therapy
• Variations of parts therapy (e.g. ego state therapy, voice dialogue, inner-child work)
• Assessing client’s suitability for parts therapy
• Importance of therapist’s experience in age regression in parts therapy
• The Affect Bridge technique of age regression
• The parts therapy technique
• Importance of therapist’s ability to deal with abreactions during parts therapy
• The Informed Child technique
• Example: parts therapy for smoking cessation

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2683
Self-hypnosis
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
Self-hypnosis is probably covered in every practitioner level hypnotherapy course. Yet, this aspect of hypnosis/hypnotherapy sometimes gets overlooked once the therapist becomes involved in the day-to-day practice of therapeutic hypnosis.
This CPD course may prove useful to the therapist for application in their own lives as well as teaching their clients self-care procedures once the therapeutic protocol comes to an end.
Main topics covered:
• Who can use self-hypnosis
• Benefits and advantages of self-hypnosis
• Practical considerations
• Dealing with distractions
• Various self-hypnosis techniques
• Self-hypnosis practice for the therapist
• Teaching clients self-hypnosis
• The process of self-hypnosis
• A complete self-hypnosis session
• Overcoming barriers/resistance

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2684
Sports Hypnosis
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
Sports psychology has been acknowledged for some time as playing a key role in the success of top athletes and sportsmen and women all over the world.
Hypnosis can be an excellent adjunct for sports psychologists and coaches, enabling individuals to improve performance quickly and maintain excellence consistently.
Sports hypnosis can be an exciting addition to the practising hypnotherapist interested in this field. It can also be a valuable additional tool for the practising sports psychologist or coach conversant with the principles of applied hypnosis.
Topics covered:
• The concept of hypnosis as mental coaching and the role of the hypnotherapist as a mental coach
• Alert/Active hypnosis
• Cornerstones of sports hypnosis – understanding the mental attitude of the athlete, dealing with negative self-talk; teaching skills based on a combination of techniques including CBT, NLP, Coaching; hetero and auto-hypnosis; regular practice through self-hypnosis
• Structure and content of a full sports hypnosis intervention (typically 4 sessions)
• Dealing with injury and pain
• Scripts

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2685
Timeline Therapy
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
Timelines
The way in which we mentally code the sights/pictures, sounds, feelings, tastes and smells of events and experiences in our past, present or future is known in NLP as a timeline. Each of us has a unique and individual timeline. The way in which we internally represent time has an effect on our lives, not just in the present, but the past and future as well.
The aim of this CPD course is to enable the student to understand the concept of time line, discover their timeline and apply it in their own lives and that of their client in order to effect positive change.
Topics covered:
• Definition and meaning of a time line
• History/origin
• Types of time lines - description, examples, exercise
• Discover your time line
• Relationship between our concept of time and language
• How we manage our memories
• Beliefs, values, attitudes
• Meta programs
• Complete illustration
• Change your future with time line therapy

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2686
Hypnosis in the Workplace
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
Increasingly, the workplace is becoming fraught with issues ranging from stress, bullying, fear of losing one’s job, to a pervading feeling of anxiety and a sense of failure. Hypnosis in the workplace can successfully address many of these issues, helping members of staff to use their inner resources to overcome challenges and even thrive on them.
The course is for practising hypnotherapists from diverse schools of thought and practice.
The aim of the course is to enable therapists to expand their practice to include the workplace and help individuals deal with some of the issues they regularly encounter in their practice, as well as some unique to a business environment.
Topics covered:
• Research into application of hypnosis in the workplace
• Mental and physical relaxation
• Workplace bullying
• Stress
• Anxiety
• Fear of public speaking and making presentations
• Relationships at work
• Working with groups
• Scripts

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2687
Hypnotherapy for the Menopause
Online
£130
CPD hours: 8
The menopause is a natural part of a woman’s life but has the potential to negatively impact her life physically, emotionally, psychologically and financially. Just when a woman reaches a time in her life when she has the wisdom, knowledge and experience to make a meaningful contribution to the workplace and to society, she is often made to feel like an outsider.
The aim of this CPD course is to enable qualified hypnotherapists and other therapists conversant in applied hypnosis to help a significant percentage of the female population alleviate some of the physical, emotional and psychological symptoms of the menopause so that they can regain their valued place in society and in the workplace.
Topics covered:
• Economic impact of the menopause on the UK economy
• What is the menopause – overview, symptoms and treatment
• Mental health problems arising from the menopause
• Research information on the role of hypnotherapy in alleviating some of the symptoms
• Hypnotherapy for hot flushes, sleep management, anxiety, stress, motivation, self-esteem and confidence, depression (non-clinical)
• Behavioural techniques of self-control
• Case studies
• Assignment

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2688
Refresher Course in Hypnotherapy
Online
£300
CPD hours: 20
The Refresher Course in Hypnotherapy is suitable for qualified hypnotherapists who may not have practised their skills for some time. The emphasis of the course is on practice rather than theory.
The course consists of a recap of the main practical elements of a practitioner level course.
Topics covered:
• Recap of inductions and deepeners
• Stages of hetero-hypnosis - preparation, induction, deepener, therapeutic suggestions, post-hypnotic suggestions, ending the session
• Teaching the client self-hypnosis
• Self-hypnosis practice for the therapist
• Motivation
• Dealing with internal and external distractions
• Working within the NOS (hypnotherapy) framework
• Establishing a practice, including practical considerations, e.g. marketing, finding a suitable location, doing online therapy
• Setting SMART goals for establishing the practice
• Practising delivery of all the stages of a hypnotherapy session
• Some frequently used inductions
• Rapid inductions

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2689
Advanced Diploma in Hypnotherapy
Online
£850
The Advanced Diploma in Hypnotherapy offered by the Oxford School of Hypnotherapy has been Assessed and Validated at Advanced Practitioner Level by the General Hypnotherapy Standards Council (UK). Graduates from this course (already qualified at Practitioner status via a course either validated by the GHSC at Practitioner Level or its equivalent) are eligible for professional registration with the General Hypnotherapy Register (the GHSC’s Registering Agency) at Advanced Practitioner status.
The course consists of six modules.
The Modules
1. Introduction
Hypnosis and Neuroscience
Models of hypnosis
2. Factors that facilitate or impede change
Advanced questioning
Handling awkward situations and questions
3. Advanced approaches: 3 advanced techniques
4. Advanced approaches: 3 advanced applications
5. Academic skills and critical thinking
Social science research methods
Advanced ethical considerations and debates in clinical practice
6. Growing as a hypnotherapist
Additional content
Reading List:
The course is comprehensive and there is no mandatory reading list. Students may wish to read some of the books listed in the reference section of the modules and/or undertake online research.
Homework requirements
At the end of each module there is an assignment composed of a number of 5 questions requiring written answers.
The homework assignments are designed in a manner that meet the learning outcomes.
Course delivery:
• The course will be delivered in an online learning format, consisting of 6 modules
• The techniques taught on the course do not require direct supervision as there are clear instructions for each.
• A single module will be sent at a time, by email
• Time allowed for completion of course: 18 months
Eligibility:
The eligibility criteria for this course is a qualification in hypnotherapy or NLP to Practitioner level. Those registered with the GHR at Practitioner level will be eligible to upgrade their registration to Advanced Practitioner status after completing the course.
Payment options by instalments are available.
Please request a course prospectus for full details.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Notes
1. All the CPD courses are offered in online format, The course material is comprehensive, with an assignment at the end of the notes. There is no accompanying webinar or video.
2. The time allowed for completion of each CPD course is one year, including submission of the assignment, in order to receive an e-certificate. The exception is the Advanced Diploma in Hypnotherapy for which the maximum duration for completion is eighteen months.
3. Please enrol on a course only if it has not already been covered in your practitioner level course. There is no refund for an online course, as the notes remain on the hard drive of your computer and can be accessed at any time.
4. Email support is available for the duration of each course and three months after completion.

5. Reena has over 25 years' experience as a practising clinical hypnotherapist and over 15 years as a hypnotherapy trainer.

 

 

 

Hypnotherapy & Holistic Health
(Ann Bowditch)
Location: Distance Learning


Ref No: 2652
Hypnotherapy CPD for Confidence CPD: 10 Hours
Distance Learning
£130
This is an in-depth course on confidence. I am author of The Power of Confidence, my second book, which provides insights to many areas of confidence. The course includes a couple of extracts from this book.
So many people are impacted by a lack of confidence, which makes this such an important area of knowledge in your practitioner handbook. This course contains many of the techniques and principles I use in my own work.
Along with 11 scripts, the course includes use of Emotional Freedom Technique in a basic form. You do not need any prior knowledge of this technique. I guide on how to personalise scripts for your client using some simple tweaks.
We use some neuro-linguistic programming so you can tailor your therapy for your client and their specific needs. All is explained so again, no prior understanding needed.
Bonus: I will provide you with my ‘Confidence Workbook” which I hand to clients to complete at home. This can provide you with some valuable information and goal setting, as well as help your clients acknowledge their achievements
Contents:
11 Scripts including a specific confidence induction and outduction
Events which can impact confidence
Components of confidence
Confidence and our belief system
SMART Goals
Important first client session – questions to ask, what you might expect to come across.
Guidance on regression work to get to the root cause (including examples)
Breathing for anxious/nervous clients
Inner voice work
Visualisation (complete scripts to use – incorporating other senses of kinaesthetic (feel) and audio)
Fear of Judgement
Setting a confidence anchor
EFT (Tapping) for confidence
Be confident like your idol
Bonus: confidence workbook
Assignment

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

Build it Brilliant Ltd
Zoe Thompson
Location: Online
 

Ref No: 2647
Getting Started with Blogging: Create, Grow and Monetise Your Blog
Online Course, 8 modules over 8 weeks
£95
This online course is designed to provide beginners with a comprehensive understanding of the fundamentals of blogging. This course will guide you through the process of creating, developing, and maintaining a successful blog. You'll learn essential techniques for generating engaging content, optimising your blog for search engines, and building a loyal readership. Perfect for those who would like to make an impact and share their voice through blogging.
What will you learn?
- Discover your voice and unique style
- Set up and customise your blog on popular platforms.
- Craft compelling and engaging blog posts that captivate readers.
- Optimise your content for search engines and increase organic traffic.
- Utilise affiliate marketing and other promotional strategies to grow your audience.
- Monetise your blog through advertising, sponsorships, and other revenue streams.
- Maintain and optimise your blog for long-term success.
PLUS 2 Extra Bonuses
-Mindset for Blogging Audio - Enjoy my 10 minute guided meditation packed full of affirmations to help you find your blogging mojo.
-Addressing Fear and Building Confidence Resources - Struggle to put your voice out there due to fear and confidence blocks? I've got you sorted with this lesson of resources.
Why Choose This Course
1) Learn from a Fellow Therapist: This course is developed by Zoe who has built a successful private practice since 2011. Benefit from my years of experience, practical tips, and insider knowledge.
2) Comprehensive Curriculum: I've meticulously crafted a comprehensive curriculum that covers every aspect of successful blogging. From setting up your blog to monetising your content, I leave no stone unturned. You'll gain a solid foundation in writing engaging posts, optimising for search engines, growing your audience, and much more.
3) Interactive Learning Experience: This online course is designed to make your learning journey engaging and interactive. You'll have access to video lessons, downloadable resources and practical exercises that reinforce your understanding and allow you to apply what you've learned.
4) Flexibility and Convenience: Learn at your own pace, on your own schedule. The course is accessible from anywhere, at any time. Whether you run your business as a side hustle, are a busy parent, or have a clinic full of clients, you can fit this course into your lifestyle and make progress on your blogging goals bit by bit.
5) Practical Strategies for Success: This course goes beyond theory. I provide you with practical strategies and actionable techniques that have been proven to drive results. Gain insider insights on content creation, search engine optimisation, audience engagement, and monetisation, setting you up for blogging success.
Enrol Today and Unlock Your Blogging Potential

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

Anne Morrison Coaching
Location: Distance Learning. Self-directed online
 


Ref No: 2645
Designing the Dream - Building the Therapy Practice that’s right for you
£197
So many therapists, when first starting out, feel unsure of themselves and how they are going to get clients, and grow their therapy practice. They’ve invested their time and money into training to be a therapist. And now they have to make it work for them. They may not have thought too much about how they are going to grow their business let alone one that meets their needs and wants for it to be right for them.
Even if they have been in practice for a few years it can sometimes still seem like a roller coaster ride - too few or too many clients and uncertainty over their cash flow and their future as a therapist.
One statement I hear a lot from therapists I work with and when chatting to more experienced therapists is that when they first started, they just didn’t know where to begin when it came to getting more clients and growing their business. Others found the thought of the ‘business’ of therapy daunting.
Even more experienced therapists would rather run a mile from some things like networking or making videos! As therapists many of us prefer small groups and familiar situations rather than make small talk to people we don’t know very well. And the thought of asking for referrals is, well - the last thing many of us want to do as we don’t want to appear salesy or pushy.
And that brings me to this course which is all about helping you build a therapy practice that’s right for you. Not right for Jo Bloggs but right for you.
Created by Anne Morrison, MBA, an experienced therapist and coach, it is based on her 20 years experience of working as a therapist. And that of friends and colleagues, who have developed their own successful therapy practices.
Planned to guide therapists through the business development process this, comprehensive course, covers everything from assessing where they are now to having an implementation plan to achieve their business goals.
This course provides an opportunity for therapists to take a step back and review their aims for their therapy practice.
As one participant said:
“Working through this course has reminded me why I trained to be a therapist and what I wanted for my life” Emma W
Course Structure:
It is an assignment-led course. Each module building on the last. There are six modules in total (including the introduction). It can be completed in 12 - 15 weeks, though that depends on how much time participants set aside to work on the course assignments.
You can access the Introduction, all of Module 1 and the first two section of Module 2 before deciding whether to continue with the course. “Try before you buy” so you can get a feel for the course and how it works.
Designing the Dream covers a number of areas, including:
●where they are now both financially and in life as a whole.
●why they want to be in business
●their aims and aspirations
●who they want to work with and how
●costing their services and setting fees
●options for promoting their therapy practice
●planning and self-management tools and techniques
●addressing blocks and limiting beliefs around money and marketing
●establishing a workable blueprint to grow their therapy practice.
Participant Feedback
“I think you have covered everything” Hayley M
“This (spreadsheet) was SO incredibly helpful - nowhere have I ever seen such an easy to use business spreadsheet. I will be using it in my own business going forward” Jackie S
The Objectives for the course are, that by the end you will:
●Know your current business and life financial situation
●Have clarified your business aims and aspirations and what resources you have to help you
●Know who you want to work with and how, and have decided your fee level
●Know what you are going to continue, stop or start doing, to promote your business
●Have a rolling weekly action plan to help you take the actions to get you there.
In module 1
●Where Are You Now? - we get to grips with how you view your business and review your current business and life financial situation. having ascertained what the starting point is
We are then going to look at the Future.
●In module 2, Future Focus we explore your aims and aspirations for your business. We look at your Why. Then start designing your dream practice. After that we consider what you bring to the business and those people and things that may help or hinder you in building your practice and ways of pre-empting or handling some of those things.
Having done some future thinking you are then going to dig deeper into your business.
●In module 3 - Your People - Services - Profit you’ll review the people you want to work with, how you will deliver your services and your fee structure and your beliefs around money
●In module 4 - Promoting Your Practice - we look at ways of Promoting yourself and your services and what might be the right fit for you.
●Then we bring it all together in Module 5 in Planning for Action when we look at different planning and time management techniques and you develop a business action plan that, when implemented, will help you achieve the therapy practice you desire.
This course is accredited for CPD by The Association for Professional Hypnosis and Psychotherapy (APHP)
To book visit https://www.annemorrisoncoaching.com/courses/designing-the-dream/?affiliate=cZhceI

 

DISTANCE LEARNING

 

Hypnosis Masters Summit

Hypnosis is a tool
Hypnosis is an art
Hypnosis is a show
Hypnosis is therapy
Hypnosis is a state
Hypnosis is a technique
Hypnosis is…

If you ask 10 people what hypnosis is, you will always get a different answer.
This is true also for professionals in the world of hypnosis!
Trust me, I’ve asked hundreds of them!

As a matter of fact, we don’t really know what hypnosis is and how or why it works. What we do know, is that it can have profound and immediate results and that is what we are looking for after all right?

I have been playing and dealing with hypnosis for a few years now and during this time, I learned that one thing I know FOR SURE, is that there is STILL a lot to be learned.

Since hypnosis is dealing with the human psyche and emotional world I can only imagine how much I don’t know about this…

Luckily for me (and for you), Eugen Popa, has put together a Hypnosis Summit with an amazing line of speakers, many of whom have been practicing and teaching hypnosis for over 20, 30, 40, and even 50 years!

Yep, you’ve read that right!
He created a one-of-a-kind event called Hypnosis Masters Summit and YOU can get to Join For FREE!

You now have the chance to learn from fantastic Hypnosis Experts such as Michael Yapko PhD, Marisa Peer, Igor Ledochowski, Adrian James PhD, Anthony Jacquin, Freddy Jacquin, Victoria Gallagher, Bob Burns, Dr Kim Redman, Rob de Groof, Sean Michael Andrews, Sheila Granger, and so many more!
Over 40 experts have gathered to give YOU the opportunity to understand and deepen your knowledge of hypnosis and hypnotherapy.

And, to make this offering truly impossible for you to refuse, it is all FOR FREE!
Simply click on THIS LINK and sign up and you are in! :)

With your Free Pass, you have FULL access to all the LIVE presentations and 24 hours after.

If you want to have LIFETIME Access to all the video and audio recordings, all the transcripts, and special bonuses from speakers and organizers, make sure to sign up for the Premium Pass.
PLEASE NOTE: Right after you sign up for the Free Pass, you will arrive on a page where you can sign up for Premium Pass for ONLY $67. This offer is valid for ONLY 30 Minutes! After that, the price will go up to $97 and you cannot go back to the $67 offer page so make sure you act Fast!

As I was saying, hypnosis is a gift that keeps on giving and I am feeling blessed to be able to be part of this event and get the chance to learn MORE Hypnosis from these amazing experts!

I Almost forgot about your bonus!! When you SIGN UP for Hypnosis Masters Summit you will automatically receive the Playbook of the Summit with information and summaries of some of the presentations from the summit!

Sign Up for the Hypnosis Masters Free Pass right now and let’s Learn, Grow, and Share together!

 

ZOOM 

 

London School of Systemic and Family Constellations
(
Illi Adato)
Location: Zoom
 

Ref No: 2498

HypnoConstellations™ Certified Practitioner Training
Expand Your Practice with HypnoConstellations™
A Transformational Training for Coaches, Therapists & Counsellors
Step into the world of HypnoConstellations™—an innovative modality that blends the profound insights of Systemic & Family Constellations with the deep inner access of Hypnotherapy.
Practitioner Training Pathway
This certified training is structured across three immersive modules. Each builds progressively, giving you confidence and competence to facilitate HypnoConstellations™ with your clients.
Module 1: INITIATION
October 26–28, 2026. Live via Zoom, 6:30–9:00 PM
Learn to guide inner constellations using hypnotic and systemic methods. This is the foundation of the Practitioner pathway.
Module 2: STRUCTURE & PHENOMENON
November 9–11, 2026. Live via Zoom, 6:30–9:00 PM
Dive deeper into the architecture of systemic healing and learn to read and respond to inner phenomena.
Module 3: IN THE REALM OF SPIRIT
December 8–10, 2026. Live via Zoom, 6:30–9:00 PM
Explore transpersonal and spiritual dimensions of the work, integrating everything into a grounded practice.
£285 per module (pay-as-you-go)
£795 full training (3 modules)

Early Registration Offer: Pay £715.50 for all three modules upfront and save 10%
Who Is This Training For?
This practitioner pathway is designed for coaches, therapists, counsellors, and healing professionals who want to bring a new dimension of depth into their work.
It is especially suited for those who:
-Wish to integrate systemic and subconscious work into their existing practice
-Want to facilitate transformation without relying on a physical therapy room or external representatives
-Are curious about ancestral, systemic, and transpersonal dynamics and how they shape client experience
-Work online or in-person and want a method that is flexible, powerful, and adaptable
-Are seeking certification in a pioneering approach that blends hypnotherapy with constellations
Whether you are already experienced in therapeutic practice or just beginning to expand your toolkit, HypnoConstellations™ offers accessible, practical, and deeply transformative methods that enhance any healing modality.
Certification:
Complete all three modules to become a Certified HypnoConstellations™ Practitioner, endorsed by the London School of Systemic & Family Constellations.
✔Live Zoom training
✔Peer practice between modules encouraged
Who’s Teaching?
Illi Adato SQHP
Systemic, Organisational & Family Constellations facilitator, member of ISCA | Recognised Master Constellator by CI – Constellators International | Hypnotherapy Senior Member of GHR (UK) & Member of IHF (USA) | Advanced NLP Therapeutic Specialist™ | Systemic Ritual® Facilitator
In Illi’s words:
“I began my journey in the therapeutic world as a Hypnotherapist, working deeply with the subconscious and visualization for healing and change. Yet something was missing—until the ‘marriage’ of Hypnotherapy and Systemic Constellations came together. That union became HypnoConstellations™, a natural, powerful way to serve clients in profound transformation.”

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

Prochange Hypnotherapy
(Gill Whitehead)
Location: Distance Learning

Ref No: 2496
'Proquit' Smoking Cessation Programme
Distance learning
£150
This training course will enable you to practice as a ‘ProQuit’ smoking cessation practitioner. It will teach qualified hypnotherapists the elements needed to deliver this 6 week programme to your clients.
Help for stopping smoking is one of the most common issues that clients approach a hypnotherapist. Many programmes involve one or two sessions, although there is evidence to suggest that most people benefit from thorough preparation and ongoing support in order to remain a non-smoker Ref. Models of delivery for stop smoking services, Public Health England, 2017
The ‘ProQuit’ programme includes the following elements;
A comprehensive assessment of the clients smoking history, habits and behaviours (printable forms included)
Establishing readiness to quit using the Stages of Change model
The use of NLP and CBT techniques to improve the client’s motivation and self-confidence to quit
The use of hypnotherapy scripts, which can be individually tailored to the client’s needs
Relapse prevention
Ongoing reinforcement of motivation and goals.
The ‘ProQuit’ programme can be delivered in an individual or group sessions, however there is more opportunity to individualise the scripts in a one-to-one session.The programme can also be delivered both online or face to face.
This course includes an assessment and certificate on successful completion.
CPD 6 hours

Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

Evolve Life Coaching College
(John Mill)
Location: Distance Learning

Ref No: 2486
Hypnotherapy Weight Loss Group Masterclass
Distance Learning
£197
How To Run A Successful Weight Loss Hypnotherapy Group, Increase Your Income & One To One Clients Too.
This course is aimed at new and experienced therapists trained in Hypnotherapy to share tried and tested strategies for running a successful weight loss group from start to finish. An 8 week weight loss programme has been developed, over the last 12 years by John Mill, influenced by the work of Judith Pearson, Paul McKenna and Louise Hay.
John has designed this unique and immensely successful programme that meets the needs of overweight people here in the UK.
This is an opportunity to share his experience with therapists who want to expand their practice, their experience and successfully run group programmes for the ever increasing numbers of obesity clients.
This 2 day comprehensive recorded ‘live’ training takes attendees through:
Setting up the group: Advanced Facebook marketing and advertising. How to advertise locally and become well known in your area.
Flyer & postcard downloadable templates editable in Microsoft Word
Client’s first contact: Phone calls, emails and text replying
Pricing your course and welcoming your group
An insight into the unusual dynamics of group work and facilitation.
Preparing yourself for working with Groups and creating the Therapeutic Alliance
The full weekend training is split into 8 separate videos covering each themed session.
Session 1: The Plan
How to open the group and build rapport.
Introducing the scales.
Discussing confidentiality, the contract and cancellations.
Managing group sharing and time.
4 themes to discuss and how you will use metaphors, suggestion and conversational hypnosis.
How to hypnotise a group and how to end the session.
Session 2: Becoming Choosy
How to educate your group on emotional and physical hunger.
How to change their relationship with food.
NLP Modal operators at play in weight management.
Understanding how to give every group member the best of you and maintain rapport for all.
An insight into the power of associations past and present.
Session 3: Loving Yourself
How to discuss the inner voice regarding your attendee’s inner critic.
Embracing the child within, an emotional and profound process that raises self-esteem and awareness.
CBT based Ego strengthening exercises to challenge negative thinking:
•What do you see in the Mirror?
•Re-tuning the Internal Voice - Meet Dolly!
•Compliments – Accept, Deflect or Reject.
Session 4: Exercise & Resistance
Understanding and maximising the group’s motivation for change
Introducing self-sabotage and resistance to your group and how awareness of these sub-conscious mechanisms can facilitate change.
How to make exercise attractive and educating them with the benefits of exercise.
Introducing all of the different ways our clients can exert themselves physically and safely.
Session 5: Secret Breakthrough
Understanding how to take your group through a hypnotic process to understand a message from with and processing this incredibly profound session.
Session 6: Play-Doh
How to use Play-Doh in a group setting to access the inner child and use their creativity to discuss how they feel currently.
How to run this highly emotive session and using the therapist’s intuition and own creativity, how to create change and leave your clients with a powerful message.
Session 7: The 7 Deadly Sins of Weight Loss
Introducing your group to the 7 sins of weight loss, each heading will lead to conversations and group members sharing feelings.
3 of the obstacles/blocks shared will be used in the final hypnosis ‘The Island Of Completion’.
Session 8: Endings & The Virtual Gastric Band
Understanding recruitment for follow on groups and continuing members.
Choices for long term weight loss goals
The Ericksonian Virtual Gastric Band (The optional one to one 9th session) – An overview of the procedure and selective process
Review of learnings – Q & A
Every session ends with a hypnosis all provided and written by your course tutor John Mill
With your lifetime membership login to this hub you will receive:
8 Live Training Videos (As above)
8 Recap Training Videos (Videos filmed by John to be used prior to your group sessions to remind you of everything learned)
4 Advanced Facebook training videos:
•Setting up your business page
•Creating audiences
•Creating a lead generation advert for your group
•Managing spending and logistics
Pdf E-book of all weight loss scripts used in the group.
Pdf E-book ‘How to run a successful weight loss hypnotherapy group
Bonus session (Alternative Session 5 For Larger Groups)
Flyer & Postcard Editable in Word

Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

PSI Training
(Mike Garrett & Nicolette Pinkney)
Location: Distance Learning

 

PSI Training have developed a unique model of therapy which is reflected in our distance-learning CPD courses. These have been adapted from our intensive weekend Masterclasses, which have been running since the mid-nineties. The content of each course is based on over 40 years of combined experience within the field of hypno-psychotherapy.
Course Structure: Upon enrolment, you will be sent the course material via email. To make best use of this course it is suggested that you read through all of the material at least once or twice, before starting to answer the questions at the end of each section. If you have difficulty in answering any question, go back and re-read the relevant section again.  You do not need to send us your answers to these questions, they are there for you to check that you have understood the course material. When you feel confident that you have absorbed the content, get in touch with us and we will send you the final assessment for you to complete. Once you have submitted your assessment, it will be marked by our assessor who holds a Royal Society of Arts NVQ award in psychotherapy/hypnotherapy training and provided you meet the required standard, you will be issued with a Diploma Certificate and registered as having completed the course.
Please contact us if you would like further information regarding any of the courses we offer.

 

Ref No: 2466
A Methodology for Developing Scripts – Online Diploma Certificate
Distance Learning
£55
Many hypnotherapy students may have trained in a directive and/or heavily script-based style of therapy. They may wish to extend their expertise away from ‘off-the-shelf’ scripts and learn how to create their own, but don’t have the knowledge or confidence to do so. Even those who have trained without being script-dependent, may still struggle with developing their own and therefore resort to predominantly reading scripts.
PSI trained students are taught to work in an impromptu form, with emphasis given to tailoring interventions to an individual client’s needs. ‘Read’ scripts are rarely used.
Whatever your prior training, we hope that this methodology for developing scripts will be useful and allow you to build on your existing knowledge. This course covers everything from the PSI approach to trance-work to the actual writing of scripts, with plenty of examples throughout. The latter will include simple copy-and-paste examples of Ericksonian language patterns. You can use these partials in an ad hoc fashion when working with our step interventions or within your own scripts.
Upon successful completion of the course assessment, we will also send you a selection of complete scripts you can print out and use within your consultations.
CONTENTS:
•PSI Working Model of Hypnosis
•Hypnotic Language – incl. social foundations, application of permissive/non-directive language, message & meta-messages, hypnotic phrasing, sensory modalities
•Linguistic Techniques
•Seeding
•Accessing Resources and Anchoring
•Future Pacing
•Scripts
•The Use of Metaphor in Scripts
•How to Develop your own Scripts
•Hypnotherapeutic Interventions – incl. frequently used techniques
•Specific Hypnotherapeutic Interventions – how to develop these to suit your clients:
Changing Feelings
Uncovering Parental Injunctions/Inhibitions
Defusing Traumas/Phobias
Changing Associated/Dissociated Status
Affect Bridge (PSI Version)
Hypno-Anaesthesia
Stein’s Clenched Fist Technique
Time Distortion
Symptom Objectification
Challenging Critical Parent/s
Positive Swish
Aversive Swish
Master Control Room Technique
Depotentiation/desensitization
Homeostatic Messaging
Resources Maturation
•All-Purpose Complete Session Script
CPD: 8 Hours

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2448
Working with Eating Disorders – Online Diploma Certificate
Distance Learning
£125
Eating disorders predominantly affect women during teenage years, however, boys, and adults of both sexes can also be affected. Eating disorders are the outward expression of deeper psychological and emotional problems. Although food seems the focus of these complaints, it is the inner problems which need dealing with in order to resolve them.
Eating disorders are rarely simple issues about food. One of the most common failures of conventional treatments is that ALL the focus is on food. In hospital in-patient treatment for anorexia, for example, a carrot-and-stick approach is used to get the patient’s weight up. Sadly, however successful this may be while they are actually in hospital, the patient usually reverts to the original behaviour as soon as they are out. This is where approaches like Solution-Focused Hypnotherapy can be so much more effective.
This CPD Masterclass covers various eating disorders and other food-focused problems and the factors that typically underlie them and will extend your therapeutic repertoire in an area that is increasingly prevalent in society.
CONTENTS:
•What is an Eating Disorder?
•Hunger and Appetite
•Body Image and Self Worth
•Food Psychology (incl. Habits, Food Addition, Willpower, Dieting)
•Eating and Emotions
•Common Eating Disorders (Anorexia, Bulimia, BED)
•Less Common Disorders (ARFID, Pica, Rumination, Orthorexia)
•Sub-Types of Eating Disorders
•Eating Disorder Diagnostic Scale
•Factors Relating to Eating Disorders
•Theories of Origin of Eating Disorders
•Prevalence (incl. Recovery Rates, Eating Disorders in Males)
•Healthy Eating Regime
•Conventional Interventions – Physical and Psychological Therapy, Familial Involvement, Co-Morbidity
•Therapeutic Interventions (incl. Systematic Problem Analysis, Setting Goals, Denial, Resistance and Commitment)
•Specific Hypnotherapeutic Treatment interventions
•Who Else Should be Involved?
•Therapist Resources
•Case Studies
CPD: 15 Hours

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2447
Substance Misuse and Chemical Dependency – Online Diploma Certificate
Distance Learning
£125
Chemical dependency and substance misuse have become an increasingly widespread problem. Today these problems affect all strata of society and all age groups and the need for effective treatments has never been more urgent. This CPD Masterclass covers a range of chemical addictions (legal, illegal and prescription substances), from experimentation through to dependence and will teach you how to assist your clients, including how to overcome denial and resistance.
Contents:
•Substance Misuse – Habits, Addictions, Misuse and Dependence
•Addiction
•The Neurobiology of Drug Addiction
•How Different Substances affect the Brain
•The Addiction Cycle (and Behaviours Within)
•Models of Addiction
•Reasons for Using
•Addictive Personalities
•Types of Drugs/Chemical Substances
•Common Recreational Substances
•Predatory Drugs
•Tolerance
•The Law
•Impact on Domestic Circumstances
•Dealing with Different Types of Chemical Dependency (incl. Alcohol, Smoking, Recreational and Medicinal Drugs)
•Conventional Interventions (incl. Drug/Alcohol Rehab, Types of Treatment and the Alcoholics/Narcotics Program)
•Therapeutic Interventions (incl. Setting Goals, Denial, Resistance and Client Commitment to Change)
•Specific Hypnotherapeutic Treatment Interventions
•Who Else Should be Involved?
•Therapist Resources
•Case Studies
CPD: 15 Hours

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2444
Working with CFS/ME and Fibromyalgia – Online Diploma Certificate
Distance Learning
£125
Chronic Fatigue Syndrome (CFS) or Myalgic Encephalomyelitis (ME) and Fibromyalgia are both relatively misunderstood illnesses. This course goes into considerable detail for each of the illnesses, in order to give you a better understanding of how they can affect an individual, both physically and psychologically. The training covers the issues you may be presented with and various treatment interventions, including specific hypnotherapeutic treatment that you might choose to use.
Contents:
•Background and Terminology
•What is Chronic Fatigue Syndrome:
a.Symptomology
b.Severity of Symptoms
c.The Body and CFS
d.Pathogenesis, Risk Factors and Prevalence
e.Testing and diagnosis
f.Prognosis
g.Setbacks or Relapses
h.Related or Similar Conditions
•Fibromyalgia, FMS (as above)
•Psychological and Emotional Factors (including stress, depression, emotional imbalances, sleep, cognitive issues and personality types)
•Children and CFS/FMS
•CFS/ME/FMS Treatment (Medical, Behavioural, Psychotherapeutic Interventions)
•Hypnotherapeutic Treatment, including treatment Interventions
•Details of Support Groups
•Case Studies
CPD: 15 Hours
 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2443
Working with Dreams and Symbolic Modelling – Online Diploma Certificate
Distance Learning
£125
This course will demonstrate how to go beyond the interpretation of dreams and actualise them as a hypnotherapeutic tool. The world of unconscious logic that underlies dreaming is explored and you will learn how to convert the most entrenched problems into a resolvable form via Symbolic Modelling, a technique pioneered by David Groves, Penny Tompkins and James Lawley.
This CPD Masterclass will explain the science behind sleeping and dreaming and enable you to deal with the range of issues that clients might present with. It includes details on how to interpret dreams, the questions you might need to ask in order to glean the information you need, and several treatment interventions, including a PSI technique, the Somatic Metaphor.
Contents:
•The Science behind Sleep
•Parasomnias/Sleep Disorders
•The History of Dream Explanations
•The Science behind Dreams
•Interpreting Dreams
•Working with Dreams: Therapeutic Interventions
•Working with Dreams: Client Work
•Case Studies
•Metaphor and Symbolic Modelling
•Using Symbols, Metaphors and Imagery in Therapy
•The Somatic Metaphor (PSI Technique)
CPD: 15 Hours

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2337
Sexual Dysfunction – Online Diploma Certificate
Distance Learning
£125
Sexual activity operates on numerous levels; the physical, emotional, cognitive, behavioural and social. This CPD masterclass will enable you to identify which components are dysfunctional and how to select and apply appropriate treatment strategies.
Sex therapy traditionally requires both partners to be present, however, with the use of hypnotherapy, clients can be treated individually. It is a field which many hypnotherapists shy away from, quite simply, because they don’t feel that they have the expertise and knowledge to deal with the number of issues that may arise. In addition, sex, by its very nature is a very personal thing and therefore some therapists themselves, don’t feel comfortable working with clients within this area. This course aims to give you the confidence, skills and facts you need in order to do so.
Contents:
•Anatomy of sex
•Understanding sex (including the sexual sequence and response cycle)
•The psycho-biology of gender
•Sexual dysfunction (an overview)
•Sex: a multi-level view
•Commonly encountered problems
•Medical issues
•Physical issues affecting both sexes
•Physical issues affecting men
•Physical issues affecting women
•Emotional issues (including intimacy, trust and infidelity)
•Cognitive issues (including SAD, expectations, anxieties, confidence, fantasies, myths)
•Behavioural issues (including inadequate sex skills, sex addiction, kinks & fetishes)
•Social issues (incl. partner relationship, cultural issues)
•Consultations
•Hypnotherapy/NLP remedial interventions
•Cognitive therapy
•Behavioural therapy (including sensate focusing)
•Case studies
CPD: 15 Hours

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2338
Working with Children – Online Diploma Certificate
Distance Learning
£125
Many therapists tend to shy away from treating children for the simple reason that they don’t feel comfortable or they just don’t know what approach to take, as children do not readily respond to the standard adult inductions or regimens. This training offers the specialised techniques required for this work.
For anyone primarily trained in treating adults, the difference in the responses of a child can be very disconcerting. However, once those differences are understood, the process can be surprisingly easy and very rewarding. Children are usually free of the sort of expectations that can inhibit adults and so are often more receptive to change work. It requires a ‘letting-go’ of many of the givens in treating adults and the embracing of a much more playful way of working. Once we achieve that level of comfort, working with children can become a joy.
Contents:
•Child logic and psychology
•Piaget’s theory of cognitive development
•Special factors in treating the under 6s
•Special factors in treating children between 6-12
•Special factors in treating adolescents
•Male/female differences
•Gillick competency and Fraser guidelines
•Confidentiality
•Essential foundation skills
•Common problem initiators
•Commonly encountered problems (over 25 problems included)
•Analysing the micro-dynamics of the problem
•Inductions and deepening techniques for children
•Hypnotherapeutic treatment interventions
•Behavioural interventions
•Case studies
CPD: 15 Hours

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2339
Working with Couples – Online Diploma Certificate
Distance Learning
£125
There are surprisingly few therapists who choose to work with couples. Perhaps to some, having two people sat in their consulting room may appear somewhat intimidating, particularly if the relationship between the two of them is antagonistic. However, once you understand the dynamics, it becomes surprisingly easy to adapt your existing therapeutic skillset, in order to offer this rewarding therapy to those needing it.
The purpose of this training is to give you a better understanding of the dynamics involved, the problems and issues you may encounter and some interventions you can use, adding a further modality to your repertoire, which in turn, gives you that Unique Selling Point.
Extend your client range by learning how to adapt your therapeutic skills to dealing with relationship problems. Couples are made-up of individuals and once the expectation and communication issues have been resolved, therapy naturally moves on to treatment of the individuals.
Contents:
•Therapies used
•Understanding relationships
•Common relationship problems (including communication issues, intimacy issues, sexual issues, trust/infidelity and violence/abuse)
•The psycho-biology of gender
•Structure of consultations
•How to handle the initial dual consultations
•Assessing readiness to change
•How to move the process of therapy on
•How to analyse the conflicts and use solution-focused techniques to clarify objectives and misunderstandings
•Information gathering (incl. conflicts, relationship models, perceptual style)
•Deciding on outcomes
•Dual Interventions (incl. Contextual reframing, sequence disruption, semantic challenges)
•NLP and hypnotherapeutic interventions
•Homework assignment for clients
•Case studies
CPD: 15 Hours

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2340
Persona Therapy – Online Diploma Certificate
Distance Learning
£125
Persona Therapy is an advanced form of Parts Therapy. It has become a popular option for therapists seeking to expand their therapeutic repertoire. This approach differs from other ‘parts-based’ therapies in the emphasis that is put on allowing the client to develop their own ‘personae list’. True to the ‘Eriksonian Principle of Utilisation', this form of therapy allows the client to draw on their own inner resources, in the development of a ‘vincular’ self. The vincular self (from the Latin ‘vincere’, to draw together), is the director of the ‘life-play’ in which the personae play out their ‘scenes’. We will also introduce the student to the ‘matrix’ system for identifying conflicts, alliances and threats amongst the client’s personae. This CPD Masterclass is based on over 25 years developing this form of therapy.
Contents:
•Precursors to Persona Therapy
•Conceptual basis
•Origins and historical awareness
•Components and categories of personae
•The personae spectrum
•Difference between personae and Multiple Personality Disorder
•The role of ‘I’
•Episodic and narrative thinking
•Cognitive bias
•Social role performance and psychodramatic roles
•The role of identity
•When to use Persona Therapy
•Types of personae problem
•Persistent dysfunctions
•Personae problems
•The five stages of Persona Therapy
•The ‘Casting’ technique (used to separate out various personae)
•How to apply structures for analyzing persona
•How to interpret each persona’s significance for the client’s problems
•How to use the ‘Persona Matrix’ to identify conflicts, alliances and threats
•How to design a ‘Cast Party’ as a therapeutic tool for carrying therapy forward
•Worked examples
•Specimen script
•Additional Persona Therapy techniques
CPD: 15 Hours

Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

International College of Clinical Hypnosis Practitioner
(Tod Cury)
Location: Distance Learning


Ref No: 2417
Delivering eTherapy Online Master Class
Distance learning
£125

This distance learning online masterclass is designed to provide practising therapists with the knowledge and understanding to effectively provide therapeutic interaction and consultations with their clients through modern digital delivery modes.
Course attendees will learn how to engage digitally (online) with clients through modern applications like WhatsApp, Skype, Zoom and other face to face digital communication applications. Instruction in setting up these applications for best possible use and technology configuration requirements to ensure uninterrupted connections during online consultation is also provided.
This master class is designed by experienced therapists and digital technologists who have been delivering online therapy and digital communications for a number of years and will be able to share the advantages and challenges that they have encountered, ensuring your provision of safe and ethical practice based processes effectively.
There are a number of benefits to both the client and the therapist and understanding how to manage and get the most from online consultations is presented. The potential challenges encountered with online consultation delivery is also presented with effective strategies, suggestions and recommendations of how to manage and reduce their occurrence.
Managing and meeting legal, data protection, GDPR and professional body regulations and codes of conduct/practice are also covered to ensure that therapists work within the current required frameworks and guidelines and processes provided. As the nature of digitally delivered therapy can cross international borders, the legal/commercial implications are also presented and how to work internationally is presented. The ICCHP provides online training to almost 5000 students globally, so we understand how to manage, engage and support a global digital infrastructure; we also use video classroom delivery to our global students, so we appreciate how to get the most from the technology and overcome any technology related issues that may arise.
Attendees have unlimited 24/7 lifetime access to the course material, which can be accessed through a PC, tablet computer or smartphone via a mobile app. Any future updates/additions to the course are also included at no additional charge. The course is flexible so there are no time limits for completion.
Course Lessons Include:
An Introduction to Understanding Digitally Delivered Therapy
Digitally Delivered Therapy Compared to Traditional Face to Face Therapy
Article: Growing Market Demand for On-line Delivered Therapy
Effectiveness of Online Delivered Therapy
Advantages and Disadvantages of Online Delivered Therapy
What Do Clients Look for When Choosing Online Therapy
Overcoming the Challenges of Delivering Online Therapy
Are You Ready and Prepared to Go Online?
Client Safety, Legal & Ethical Practice Considerations of Online Delivered Therapy
Technology Considerations For Delivering Online Therapy
What Technology Should I Use to Deliver Online Therapy?
Example Case Study - End to End Online Hypnotherapy Engagement
Edited Client Session Video
Participant Discussion Forum
References
Articles of Interest
On-line Therapy Providers
Professional Bodies
Links to Video Conferencing Applications & Other Resources

 

Book Now          Contact us  

 

Ref No: 2418
Integrating Mindfulness with Hypnotherapy Online Master Class
Distance learning
£125
This distance learning Integrating Mindfulness with Hypnotherapy master class introduces
the practice of mindfulness and the Mindfulness Based Stress Reduction (MBSR)
programme and how mindfulness can be integrated with hypnotherapy. It includes live
video of the classroom teaching sessions, along with all course notes and scripts.
Course Topics Include:
• What is Mindfulness?
• Mindfulness Training – How to Achieve Mindfulness
• Research on Mindfulness
• Is Mindfulness the Same as Hypnosis?
• How Can Mindfulness and Hypnotherapy Be Integrated?
• Case Discussion
• Resources and References
• Attendees have unlimited 24/7 lifetime access to the course material, which can be
accessed through a PC, tablet computer or smartphone via a mobile app. Any future
updates/additions to the course are also included at no additional charge. The
course is flexible so there are no time limits for completion.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2419
Smoking Cessation Online Master Class
Distance learning
£125
This distance learning online delivered master class includes every aspect of
hypnotherapeutic smoking cessation. It includes live video of the classroom teaching
sessions and also real live client treatment sessions, along with all course notes and
scripts.
Smoking cessation through hypnotherapeutic approaches are applied to the habitual
behaviours and the conditioned responses, in addition to the individual's beliefs associated
with smoking. This is directed at both conscious and unconscious levels of processing and
memory. The hypnotherapist will engage with a client at a conscious level when discussing
a person's smoking habits and their desired goal to become a non smoker. Then through
trance work reinforce the conscious engagement and reprogramme the conditioned
responses, behaviours and beliefs at an unconscious level, where effective change takes
place. With a highly motivated person this change can be achieved within a 45 minute
trance session, which no other form or approach to smoking cessation can ever achieve.
Hypnotherapy approaches treat the conditioned responses and not the nicotine addiction.
Both hypnotherapists and ex-smokers who have used hypnotherapy will provide first hand
evidence of its effectiveness and success. The difficulty with hypnotherapy for smoking
cessation is that there are no large scale research studies or concrete evidence to support
the claims made by both hypnotherapists and those who have become non smokers
through hypnotherapy. In addition, the subjective nature of hypnotherapy application
further complicates data collection, as there are a number of different approaches that a
hypnotherapist can use to treat a smoker. There are no standard evidenced based
hypnotherapeutic treatment protocols for smoking cessation that can demonstrate its
efficacy of use. Nor can claimed success rates be independently verified. The treatment
approach presented by the ICCHP is based on therapeutic processes that have
demonstrated high levels of successful outcomes for smoking cessation. The success of
this approach and these processes is dependent on the ability of the hypnotherapist to
correctly assess the presenting smoker's level of motivation, gather comprehensive
information about the smoker's current and historical smoking habits and beliefs, obtain a
comprehensive understanding of the smoker's motivation and desire to become a non
smoker (goals, benefits, etc.) and to apply and interweave this information into the delivery
of the therapeutic processes.
Course Topics Include:
• Introduction to Smoking Cessation
• The Health Benefits of Smoking Cessation
• Other Perceived Benefits of Smoking Cessation
• The Challenges of Smoking Cessation
• Research on Smoking Cessation
• The Financial Costs of Smoking Cessation
• Hypnotherapy for Smoking Cessation
• Hypnotherapeutic Approaches to Smoking Cessation
• Some Principles of Hypnotherapy for Smoking Cessation
• Client Assessment for Smoking Cessation
• The Smoking Cessation Process for Hypnotherapists
• The One Session Hypnotherapy Approach for Smoking Cessation
• Smoking Cessation Script
• Attendees have unlimited 24/7 lifetime access to the course material, which can be
accessed through a PC, tablet computer or smartphone via a mobile app. Any future
updates/additions to the course are also included at no additional charge. The
course is flexible so there are no time limits for completion.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2420
Treating Weight Related Disorders Online Master Class
Distance learning
£125
This distance learning online delivered master class includes every aspect of
hypnotherapeutic treatments of weight related disorders. It includes live video of the
classroom teaching sessions and also a real live client treatment session, along with all
course notes and scripts. Weight related disorders are those where the individual is unable
to maintain an appropriate and healthy weight shape and size for their sex, age and
height, causing an impact and risk to the individual's immediate and future health and wellbeing. This master class is designed to help you understand the different weight related
disorders, their impact on health and well-being, conventional treatment approaches and
how as a hypnotherapist you can work with these individuals independently oras part of a
multi-disciplinary health care team, in order to help them to overcome their condition.
Course Topics Include:
• Understanding Weight Related Disorders
• Understanding Body Mass Index (BMI) and Other Measurement Standards
• The Growing Need for Weight Management & Control
• Current Useful Reports
• Assessing the Presenting Patient
• Treatment Strategy & Planning
• Specific Treatment Approaches
• Case Study Exercise
• Course Notes
• Only Eat when Hungry
• Diets Make You Fat
• Back Up Recording
• Patient Progress Chart
• General Weight Control Script
• Bariatric Resources
• Gastric Band Script
• Obesity Cancer Study
• Reduction of Fat Consumption Leads to Weight Loss Research
• Attendees have unlimited 24/7 lifetime access to the course material, which can be
accessed through a PC, tablet computer or smartphone via a mobile app. Any future
updates/additions to the course are also included at no additional charge. The
course is flexible so there are no time limits for completion.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2421
Practice Management Master Class
Distance learning
£125
This distance learning online delivered master class includes all aspects of setting up and
managing a hypnotherapy practice. It includes live video of the classroom teaching
sessions, course notes and resources.
This master class will provide you with information and ideas to help get you started in
practice as a hypnotherapist and also inform you how to build your practice ongoing, which
could be one of the most difficult challenges you may face as a hypnotherapist. Learning
from others who have been through these challenges will help you to overcome these and
plan your growth in practice.
Topics covered include:
• Building Your Practice Introduction
• Fit to Practice
• Ready to Practice
• Preparing a practice business plan.
• What am I trained in, competent, confident and comfortable to offer as a service to
clients?
• What are my skills? How to use these effectively.
• Target and types of clients? Thinking outside of the traditional box.
• Locations: Where to practice?
• Competition?
• Using Skype with clients.
• Setting up a website.
• The Bottom Line to Your Bottom Line
• Financial considerations. What to charge? What can I afford?
• Financial planning and budgeting.
• Branding or not?
• Business structure. Sole trader or company?
• Administration, Record keeping, Legal & Data Protection.
• Forms, client information sheets.
• Storing records - paper and electronic.
• Book-keeping.
• Ethics & conduct (GHR, CNHC).
• Stationary & printed material.
• Insurance.
• Marketing, Promotions & Advertising.
• How to obtain clients.
• Networking (making the right friends).
• Private/NHS.
• How to obtain referrals (secret to future growth).
• Organising group talks.
• TV, radio, press exposure opportunities.
• Using social media.
• How to use and set up a Facebook ad.
• How to use and set up a Google Adwords ad.
• CNHC/GHR guides and guidelines.
• ICCHP and External Resources Available
• Online access resources.
• Website hosting/development.
• Courses/subscriptions/CPD.
• Online support groups.
• What to watch out for and avoid, save your money! One mistake like signing up for
a special offer deal to put you on a list will cost you more than this master class.
How to spot and avoid these scams will save you money.
• Much more is presented and provided. All your questions, worries and concerns
answered.
• Resources and References
• Attendees have unlimited 24/7 lifetime access to the course material, which can be
accessed through a PC, tablet computer or smartphone via a mobile app. Any future
updates/additions to the course are also included at no additional charge. The
course is flexible so there are no time limits for completion.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2422
Behavioural Hypnotherapy Practice
Distance learning
£150
This distance learning online delivered module introduces you to the theories and
principles of behavioural psychology and the integration of hypnosis. You will be
introduced to the traditional behavioural therapy techniques and shown how these can be
applied in a hypnotherapeutic setting. You will also see how hypno behavioural techniques
can be applied to treat a few simple symptoms such as nail biting, performance anxiety
and stress management.
Topics Covered:
Behavioural Psychology &
Hypnosis
Behavioural Psychotherapy
Cognitive Behavioural Therapy
Rational Emotive Behavioural
Therapy
Locus of Control
Flooding & Massed Practice
Aversion Therapy
Systematic Desensitisation
Hypno Desensitisation
Assertiveness Training
Control Room of the Mind
Modifying Thought
Patterns
Memory Substitution
Anchoring
Reversed Suggestions
Performance Anxiety
Stress Management
Learning Difficulties
• Theory notes, practice notes, scripts, classroom teaching and demonstration
videos, additional learning resources and references are included.
• Attendees have unlimited 24/7 lifetime access to the course material, which can be
accessed through a PC, tablet computer or smartphone via a mobile app. Any future
updates/additions to the course are also included at no additional charge. The
course is flexible so there are no time limits for completion.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2423
Psycho-dynamic Hypnotherapy Practice
Distance learning
£150
This distance learning online delivered module introduces you to the theories and
principles of psycho-dynamic psychology and the integration of hypnosis. You will be
introduced to the traditional psycho-dynamic approaches to psychotherapy and shown
how these can be applied in a hypno-therapeutic setting. You will learn the concepts and
techniques associated with dissociation, and age regression. Additional intervention
approaches addressing sleep and dreams are also presented.
Topics Covered:
Dissociation
Dissociation & Deepening
Dissociation & Neurosis
One Part Dissociation
Multiple Parts Dissociation
Two Staged Dissociation
Secondary Gains
Sleep & Dreams
Therapeutic Use of
Dreams
Inner Child
Psychodrama &
Hypnodrama
Regression
Diagnostic Scale
Regression
Specific Age Regression
Free Floating Regression
Symptom Manipulation
Miscellaneous Regressions
Past Life Regression
Self Integration Dissociation
Free Floating Pseudo Orientation in
Time
Psychoanalysis
Analytical Psychology
Individual Psychology
Gestalt Therapy
Client Centred Therapy
Transactional Analysis
• Theory notes, practice notes, scripts, classroom teaching and demonstration
videos, additional learning resources and references are included.
• Attendees have unlimited 24/7 lifetime access to the course material, which can be
accessed through a PC, tablet computer or smartphone via a mobile app. Any future
updates/additions to the course are also included at no additional charge. The
course is flexible so there are no time limits for completion.

 

Book Now          Contact us


Ref No: 2424
Indirect Conversational (Erickson) Hypnotherapy Practice
Distance learning
£150
This distance learning online delivered module introduces introduces you to the theories
and principles of indirect approaches to hypnotherapy, sometimes referred to as Erickson
or Conversational Hypnosis. You will be introduced to the principles of indirect approaches
to therapy and shown how these can be applied in a hypnotherapeutic setting. You will
discover the effective language of indirect hypnosis and the creative use of metaphor.
Additional indirect techniques are presented and an application of indirect hypnosis to treat
phobias is introduced.
Topics Covered:
Indirect (Erickson) Hypnosis
Meta Model
Eye Accessing Cues
Generalisation, Deletion &
Distortion
Challenging Patient's Statements
Truisms
Truisms Utilising Time
Not Knowing & Not Doing
Open Ended Suggestions
Covering All Possibilities
Compound Suggestions
The Yes Set
Use of Negatives
Use of Questions
Using Metaphors
Positive Phobia
Replacement
Pattern Breaking
Inductions
Confusion Techniques
Interspersion Technique
• Theory notes, practice notes, scripts, classroom teaching and demonstration
videos, additional learning resources and references are included.
• Attendees have unlimited 24/7 lifetime access to the course material, which can be
accessed through a PC, tablet computer or smartphone via a mobile app. Any future
updates/additions to the course are also included at no additional charge. The
course is flexible so there are no time limits for completion.

 

Book Now          Contact us


Ref No: 2425
Applied Hypnotherapeutics
Distance learning
£150
This distance learning online delivered module introduces you to various patient
presenting conditions, symptoms and illnesses that can be therapeutically treated through
the application of the principles and techniques of hypnotherapy. Patient case studies are
presented for you to analyse, and you will have the opportunity to apply your learning to
formulate treatment strategies for these patients. The completion of this level of training
represents the theoretical and practical learning necessary for students wishing to become
student hypnotherapy practitioners.
Topics Covered:
Snoring
Stammering
Insomnia & Sleep
Disorders
Weight Management
Pain Management
Headaches
Irritable Bowel Syndrome
Dermatology
Panic Attacks
Panic Disorder
Dystonia (Nervous Tic)
Asthma
Erythrophobia (Blushing)
Tinnitus
Sport Performance
Obstetrics
Childhood Anxiety Disorders
Enuresis (Bed Wetting)
Psychogenic Infertility
Depression
Hypnodontics & Bruxism
Allergies
Phobias
Dreams & Night Terrors
Hallucinations
Paranoia & Delusional
Disorders
• Theory notes, practice notes, scripts, classroom teaching and demonstration
videos, additional learning resources and references are included.
• Attendees have unlimited 24/7 lifetime access to the course material, which can be
accessed through a PC, tablet computer or smartphone via a mobile app. Any future
updates/additions to the course are also included at no additional charge. The
course is flexible so there are no time limits for completion.

 

Book Now          Contact us


Ref No: 2426
Advanced Hypnotherapy Practice
Distance learning
£150
This distance learning online delivered module introduces you to more advanced
hypnotherapy concepts and additional psychotherapeutic techniques and intervention
approaches. These will expand and add greater value to the knowledge that you have
already acquired through your previous studies, and help you in your practice when
working with patients. The follow on module to this module, Advanced Practitioners
Application, will introduce you to more complex patient presenting symptoms and the
theoretical background to many modern day illnesses. It will further expand and add
greater value to the knowledge that you have already acquired through your previous
studies, and help you in your practice when working with patients.
Topics Covered Include:
Brief Solution Focused
Hypnotherapy
Solution Focused Questioning
Solution Focused Goal Setting
Problem Focused Language
Use of Comparative Scaling
Apposition of Opposites
Polarity Dissociation
Overcoming Restrictive Feelings
NLP Fast Phobia Cure
Mind Body Dissociation
Pseudo Regressive Therapy
Eye Movement Related
Therapies
Quantum Psychology
Symptom Deconstruction
Symptom Signalling
Symptom De-labelling
Inner Emptiness Re-integration
Ego State Hypnotherapy
Working with Beliefs
Time Lines
• Theory notes, practice notes, scripts, classroom teaching and demonstration
videos, additional learning resources and references are included.
• Attendees have unlimited 24/7 lifetime access to the course material, which can be
accessed through a PC, tablet computer or smartphone via a mobile app. Any future
updates/additions to the course are also included at no additional charge. The
course is flexible so there are no time limits for completion.

 

Book Now          Contact us


Ref No: 2427
Advanced Hypnotherapy Applications
Distance learning
£150
This distance learning online delivered module introduces you to more complex patient
presenting symptoms and the background to many modern day illnesses, along with their
treatment protocols. Additional therapeutic techniques and intervention approaches are
introduced. The section on presenting symptom case studies give you, as a student, the
opportunity to apply your accumulated knowledge and learning to real life patient
scenarios. It will further expand and add greater value to the knowledge that you have
already acquired through your previous studies, and help you in your practice when
working with patients.
Topics Covered:
Bereavement & Loss
Excessive Grief
Sexual Abuse
Rape & Sexual Assault
Pregnancy Loss
Terminal Illness
Hypnosis in Oncology
Trauma & Post Traumatic Stress Disorder
(PTSD)
Anger Management
Excessive Alcohol Consumption
Substance Misuse & Dependency
Emotional Abuse
Physical Abuse
Eating Disorders
Obsessive Compulsive Disorder
(OCD)
Cardiovascular Hypnosis
Psycho-sexual Disorders
HIV & AIDS
Attention Deficit Disorder (ADD/ADHD)
Patient Case Studies
Dissociative Identity Disorder (DID)
• Theory notes, practice notes, scripts, classroom teaching and demonstration
videos, additional learning resources and references are included.
• Attendees have unlimited 24/7 lifetime access to the course material, which can be
accessed through a PC, tablet computer or smartphone via a mobile app. Any future
updates/additions to the course are also included at no additional charge. The
course is flexible so there are no time limits for completion.

 

Book Now          Contact us


Ref No: 2428
Rational Emotive Cognitive Behaviour Hypnotherapy (RECBH) Practice
Distance learning
£150
This distance learning online delivered module introduces you to the concepts, process
and methodology of Rational Emotive Cognitive Behavioural Therapy (RECBT) and its
integration with hypnotherapeutic approaches. The RECBT framework applied in this
course is based on Albert Ellis' Rational Emotive Behavioural Therapy (REBT) model of
CBT.
Topics Covered:
Cognitive Behavioural
Hypnotherapy
Healthy & Unhealthy Beliefs
Psychological Disturbance
Negative Emotions
Change Process
RECBH Process &
Methodology
Accessing Complex Emotions
Disputing Beliefs
• Theory notes, practice notes, scripts, classroom teaching and demonstration
videos, additional learning resources and references are included.
• Attendees have unlimited 24/7 lifetime access to the course material, which can be
accessed through a PC, tablet computer or smartphone via a mobile app. Any future
updates/additions to the course are also included at no additional charge. The
course is flexible so there are no time limits for completion.

 

Book Now          Contact us


Ref No: 2429
Rational Emotive Cognitive Behaviour Hypnotherapy (RECBH) Application
Distance learning
£150
This distance learning online delivered module introduces you to the application and
integration of RECBH into the hypnotherapeutic approaches. Practitioners will learn how to
integrate the hypnotherapeutic techniques effectively and apply them within a cognitive
behavioural therapy framework.
Topics Covered Include:
RECBH Integration
Obstacles to Integration
Solution Integration
RECBH Parts
Dissociation
RECBH Regression Techniques
RECBH & Direct Suggestion
RECBH Application & Treatment
Protocols
RECBH Goal Directed Therapy
• Theory notes, practice notes, scripts, classroom teaching and demonstration
videos, additional learning resources and references are included.
• Attendees have unlimited 24/7 lifetime access to the course material, which can be
accessed through a PC, tablet computer or smartphone via a mobile app. Any future
updates/additions to the course are also included at no additional charge. The
course is flexible so there are no time limits for completion.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2430
Advanced Integrative Hypnotherapy Practice & Application
Distance learning
£150
This distance learning online delivered module introduces you to the practice and
application of working in an integrative approach, incorporating concepts and components
from all previous topics and techniques, so that you can help treat a greater number of
clients in an effective way, ensuring greater success and more positive client outcomes. By
understanding advanced assessment and treatment frameworks you will be able to rapidly
assess the needs of the client and choose the best treatment strategy and approaches to
help the client progress towards their goals. Real life client case studies are presented and
discussed as examples of effective integrative practice.
Topics Covered:
Integrative Hypnotherapy Integrative Treatment
Concepts
Client Assessment Frameworks
Treatment Strategy &
Frameworks
Approaches
Integrative Treatment Case
Studies
• Theory notes, practice notes, scripts, classroom teaching and demonstration
videos, additional learning resources and references are included.
• Attendees have unlimited 24/7 lifetime access to the course material, which can be
accessed through a PC, tablet computer or smartphone via a mobile app. Any future
updates/additions to the course are also included at no additional charge. The
course is flexible so there are no time limits for completion.

 

Book Now          Contact us


Ref No: 2431
Evidence-based Hypnotherapy Practice & Application
Distance learning
£150
This distance learning online delivered module introduces you to the concepts of evidencebased practice and how you can effectively incorporate an evidence based framework into
your clinical practice. Practitioners will learn how to access and analyse the latest
therapeutic hypnosis research data to better inform your clinical decisions and improve
client care.
Topics Covered:
Evidence-based Practice
Concepts
Evidence-based Practice
Frameworks
Integrating Evidence-based
Practice
Accessing Research Data
Understanding Research Data
Applying Research Data to Inform Clinical
Decisions
• Theory notes, practice notes, scripts, classroom teaching and demonstration
videos, additional learning resources and references are included.
• Attendees have unlimited 24/7 lifetime access to the course material, which can be
accessed through a PC, tablet computer or smartphone via a mobile app. Any future
updates/additions to the course are also included at no additional charge. The
course is flexible so there are no time limits for completion.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

Fertility2Birth
(Juliet Hollingsworth)
Location: Distance Learning
 

Ref No: 2416

Hypnobirthing Practitioner Training for the Professional Hypnotherapist
Distance Learning via 14 online videos
£69.99
Here you will find an extremely thorough practitioner training for the practising hypnotherapist that wants to work with pregnant women.
All professional hypnotherapists have the knowledge and ability to provide hypnosis techniques for the pregnant women but few have the physiological knowledge and experience of birthing practises to fully educate women. When a pregnant woman seeks out a hypnotherapist to guide her towards a hypnobirth she is seeking far more than hypnosis.
This course will equip you with all the knowledge you need to put alongside your favourite hypnotherapy techniques to run in depth hypnobirthing classes.
In faith that you will complete the recommended reading you will receive a certificate at the end of the course, with the confirmation that you have completed ten hours of CPD.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

The Fertile Mind - Working with Infertility
Distance Learning
FREE
I have spent more than twelve years working with people struggling with infertility, and providing courses to pass what I have learnt onto other professionals.
For the first time ever I am offering this information, to you, for free.
By clicking on the below link you will be taken straight to my free online course - The Fertile Mind - Working with Infertility. On completion of the course you will receive a CPD documented certificate confirming that you have completed the course.
I hope you enjoy the course and I appreciate any feedback you may have.
https://www.fertility2birth.com/courses/hypnotherapy-training/

 

 


Pebbles Hypnotherapy
(Helen Breward)
Location: Distance Learning (Zoom)

 

Ref No: 2559
Mindset for Success & Abundance
Distance Learning
£97
How would you like 2022 to be?
What would you like to achieve this year?
Any time of the year is good to set ourselves goals and dreams for the new year, just the same as we do with clients. So, now is always a great time to be working on removing blocks and attracting abundance. Many people are interested in discovering and removing those blocks to money abundance.
Often, we block our own prosperity and abundance because we don't believe that we are worth it, we have negative beliefs towards success and money. All of this often prevents a wealth of success and money that is possible.
So how would it feel, to help your clients and yourself to remove those blocks to success and money, and then attract more wealth and abundance into your life?
As we know mindset is the key. Removing those blocks and replacing with a different positive point of view, giving ourselves and our clients, a success and an abundant attitude could make a massive difference to 2022.
This mindset for success workbook, takes you through step by step to find your blocks to success and money, remove them and raise your own vibrations towards money. This pack also includes 3 scripts for you to use with your clients and yourself if you choose, plus the audios from those scripts.
The course can be spread out over three weeks with your clients. It is very clearly laid out with week one, week two, week 3 in the workbook, so that all you have to do is send the client that weeks information and deliver the hypnosis script attached to that week. This is of course that really is done for you. All you have to do is pick it up and go.
This is the perfect time to help clients with that abundant mindset. There are more people now than ever before interested and curious about abundance, attracting those things that we wish to ourselves and the wider cosmos.
I really want your 2022 to be the outstanding year you deserve it to be, this is why developing and enhancing your success mindset is so important.
You will receive as a download
•Mindset for success workbook
•mindset for success scripts
•3 hypnosis audios, one from each week
•Certificate
All of this for a great deal of £97, This is a small investment in yourself and your business that could potentially propel you & your clients towards greater things this. So, if you feel that you and your business is worth investing £97, then click the button below.
A focused mindset is one of the most important things but successful people do. It is something that they work on undeveloped overtime, with help.
So, think for a moment:
How would you like your life to look at the end this year?
How much would you like to be earning?
What would you like to be doing?
Would you like to be successful?
Just imagine your year flowing with abundance and success. If money flowed easily and naturally to you, what would you achieve? What could you achieve? What difference would that make to your business and your life? Equally what difference could you make using this programme with some of your clients to their lives?

 

Book Now          Contact us
 

Ref No: 2358
Sleep Well Programme DLP by Helen Breward
Distance Learning
Special Price £67
The UK National health Service recommends that adults get 7-9 hours’ sleep every night.
200,000 work days are lost each year in the UK due to lack of sleep. That costs the country 30 billion pounds every year. But, can you really put a price on mental health and physical wellbeing? Consider the impact of disturbed sleep, how that directly impacts the following day and how we feel physically and mentally. Long periods of sleep deprivation can set off a series of deeper health issues, such as stress and depression to name a few.
Teaching your clients good sleeping habits is invaluable. Sleep Well, working with insomnia contains the scripts and tools I teach my own clients, especially those that are stressed and depressed. Personally, 99% of the time, this is the first thing I do with these clients because that is what they need immediately. You can’t teach them strategies if they are not mentally in the space to learn.
The course contains
Sleep Well Manual
Background Information (sleep disorders, affects of poor sleep, causes, sleep rhythm)
How to handle that initial enquiry
Scripts
CPD Certificate
1 hour video conference with Helen Breward
I really want to help you help your clients to get a good and decent night’s sleep. So, with that in mind, this downloadable distance learning course is on offer for a special price of £67 just for GHR members. The Sleep Well, working with insomnia is available on my website for £127. Take advantage of this special price just for you.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2359
Virtual Gastric Band Specialist Training – DLP
Distance Learning
Special Price £325
Be Ready for New Year, New Me 2020 Resolutions with a very popular weight loss programme, only £325 with added bonuses worth £681.
Following the massive success of Sheila Grangers new book, No More Diets!, more and more people are actively seeking out hypnotherapists that use the virtual gastric band programme, Sheila’s in particular. This is your opportunity to learn Sheila Granger’s globally acclaimed Virtual Gastric Band Programme, with myself, Helen Breward an accredited Sheila Granger VGB Trainer. You will be able to offer this service to your current clients and potential ones who are looking for a long-term solution to weight management.
I can help you to help your clients shed the pounds and stones. Richard Kellow, a VGB practitioner in New Zealand, personally trained by me, was recently interviewed on TV because of his outstanding success with the virtual gastric band programme. He is now fully booked well in to 2020, helping clients to have a healthier relationship with food and themselves.
I was able to recoup the cost of my investment in this programme with my first client. Since then, I have helped countless clients and grown my business.
The programme focuses on
•Helping clients to be satisfied on smaller amounts of food.
•Being aware & taking control of their food choices.
•Knowing when they are full and stopping easily.
•Sensible and sustainable eating patterns. Essentially, learning everything in moderation.
•No diet to follow and encouragement to become more active in fun ways.
A recent client has lost 1 stone in 1 month and dropped a dress size. They are amazed at their own ability to stop eating when they are full and just not want the sweet sugary foods. I see the smile get bigger every session.
This is a comment I received from a client after 1 week, who has typically been struggling since childhood with food.
'Hi Helen, I am Feeling great, very positive and coping really well with my meal choices. So, I have lost 5 1/2 lbs, an inch off my bust and 1/2 inch off everywhere else. I am very happy with this!'
Another client lost 4 stone and gained control of her eating habits in 6 months.
The Virtual Gastric Band Programme consists of, you will receive
•Comprehensive training manual.
•Background information.
•Scripts for a 4-session programme + an extra script for support.
•Press releases for you to use and adapt.
•CD with supporting sound tracks i.e. surgery sounds.
Because I really want to help you to help your weight loss clients, this 2-day downloadable distance learning course is being offered at this price of only £325 with added bonuses worth £681. The course will be £397, so take advantage of the early bird special and extra bonuses.
Bonuses you will receive –
•Recording of a live VGB training seminar with Sheila Granger worth £397
•Sheila’s 1 day marketing course worth £227
•Planning & Focus training session by Helen Breward, worth £57
Secure your training and bonuses now
Think about how many potential extra clients this training could bring to your practice.
Stand out from the crowd and help your clients to a healthier future. Do it today to make a difference tomorrow.
Helen Breward
International Hypnotherapist, Speaker, Trainer & Author

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2360
Confident Me DLP by Helen Breward
Distance Learning
Special Price £67
On a scale of 1 to 10, how high is your confidence? This is often a question I ask clients. So, out of curiosity just ask yourself what your number is.
I have found over the years, with probably 99% of client’s, confidence is usually low and needs a boost in some way. Some clients come for sessions solely focused on improving their confidence because it is stopping them being who they want to be, affecting their life or career in some way that has become unacceptable to them.
As you probably already know, confidence is one of our foundations as a person that can affect our lives in many ways. Having good tools and methods to use with these clients can make a massive difference to them.
Knowing how to help and having resources to hand has been invaluable over the years. This is why I have created a programme focussed raising confidence.
The course contains
Confident Me Manual
Background Information (What is confidence, comfort zone, self-esteem & self-image)
How to handle that initial enquiry
Scripts for 3 sessions
CPD Certificate
1 hour video call with Helen Breward
As always, I want to help you help your clients to raise their confidence, so that they can have the life they want & deserve. So, with that in mind, this downloadable distance learning course is on offer for GHR members for the special price of £67. Confident Me, working with confidence is available on my website for £127. Take advantage of this while you can.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 


LIONHEART TRAINING

(Steve Burgess)
Venue: Webinar


Ref No: 2343
ONLINE TRAINING COURSE IN A MASTERLY ERNEST ROSSI TECHNIQUE
Webinar (replay link available after the live broadcast)
£45
A really special therapy technique that can help with any issue
I was highly fortunate to attend a training course given by Rossi in the early 1990's and I can honestly say that it changed my life and shaped my professional career and success as a Hypnotherapist. For me Rossi is a genius! I rarely share this technique but it's one which is dear to my heart; I'm looking forward to demonstrating you it to in this new Hypno-training Webinar. It's easy to learn, very effective with a range of client issues and quite unusual. As well as this powerful technique I'll be sharing with you an extra Rossi technique that is very creative and which can help clients in so many ways.
Rossi worked with Milton Erickson for the last 8 years of Erickson's life and was instrumental in bringing much of his work to light. Like Erickson he became a highly creative hypnotherapist who believed that the client's subconscious should do the work in therapy sessions, and both the Rossi techniques in this webinar does just that.
Join me for this live webinar, which consists of an explanation of Rossi and his ways of working, a demonstration of the technique and a script.
Maybe Rossi can super-charge your professional career just as he did mine!

 

Book Now          Contact us  

 

 

 

Natural Healing
(Edyta Tchorzewska)
Location: Distance Learning


Ref No: 2342
Pain Management
Distance learning
£50
•Body and Mind Connection
•Mind and Physical Illness
•Conscious Mind, Unconscious Mind and Human
•General approach to Physical symptoms caused by stress- Exercise with Client
•What is Pain and how to manage pain naturally
•Benefits of Relaxation- relaxation & breathing exercise, Self-Hypnosis training
•Meditation
•NLP Exercises for Pain Management
•How to get what you desire – Powerful Mirror Technique
•Mental Imagery for Pain Management and Illness
•Visualisation Exercise
•Laughter, Emotion
•Pain Relive Herbs and Essential Oils
•Sound Vibration Healing for Your Wellbeing
•Energies
•Energy, grounding exercise and how to see your energy filed
•Reiki – energy healing
•Swinging Arms Exercise to improve Vascular and Respiratory Health

 

Book Now          Contact us  

 

 


P
ebbles Hypnotherapy
(Helen Breward)
Venue: Distance Learning
 

Ref No: 2308
Work Confidently with Stress & Anxiety
Distance Learning Pack
£297
In 2017, over 500,000 workers in the UK were suffering with work-related stress, anxiety or depression, according to the survey by The Health and Safety Executive UK. It was found that 44% felt it was workload related. That also equated to 12 and a half million lost work days. Specific jobs have also been identified as having higher stress levels; healthcare workers, teachers, business public service industries and the media.
As hypnotherapists, we can teach these individuals coping strategies and provide them with practical tools to better deal with their own personal stress & anxiety levels. This is one of the most common issues I personally see regularly in my practise. So, it’s not surprising that over the years I have mentally put together a best practice method for dealing with this issue.
The programme focuses on
•Teaching client’s practical tools to use if necessary.
•Being aware & taking control of their stress & anxiety levels.
•Developing a more positive mindset and a different point of view.
•Creating a better work life balance.
A recent client sent me this lovely message:
“I loved our sessions. You first of all listened, identified the cause of the issues and then created tools using my geeky language. Your methods are practical, easy to understand and really help with the stresses and things life presents to us. It is hard to express the huge positive impact you had on me. Thank you Helen“
You will learn exactly how to help and teach these clients to manage their stress & anxiety. How to mentally switch off. Become mentally stronger and have strategies in place that are easy to maintain & use in any situation. How to adapt clinical methods to suit the client.
A short while ago a client’s family member stopped me in the street to say
“Thank you for everything you are doing for my brother. It is making a big difference. It is great to see him smiling and being part of the family again. He is so much more relaxed now that he is able to manage his stress. So, thank you Helen.”
The Programme consists of:
•Comprehensive training manual.
•Background information.
•Comprehensive ‘toolbox’ of practical methods to teach your clients that work.
•Scripts for a 6 session programme.
•Recorded 2 day training replays
•1 hour 1 to 1 video conference to discuss any questions you may have after you have completed the training.
Stand out from the crowd, and be the stress & anxiety expert in your area. Be the go to hypnotherapist.
Because I really want to help you to help your stressed & anxious clients, this downloadable Distance
Secure your training now, Don’t miss out on this great opportunity.
Do think about how many potential extra clients this training could bring to your practice.
Stand out from the crowd and help your clients to a happier life.
Helen Breward
International Hypnotherapist, Speaker, Trainer & Author
 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

Hypnotherapy & Holistic Health
(Ann Bowditch)

Location: Distance Learning 
 

Ref No: 2957
Hypnotherapy CPD for Sports Performance
Distance Learning
£125
I ran my first half marathon at 12 years of age. I also played hockey and ran for my Island. I have competed in 3 Commonwealth Games and was 3 times UK National Hill Climb Champion in the sport of cycling. Sport has been a huge part of my life for over 35 years.
My knowledge of sport has also helped me to understand my sports performance clients well. As with anything, experience counts for a lot.
In this Course, I have included 10 scripts and explained how these can be personalised for use with your clients. The course includes a number of tips, techniques and guidance on how to approach the individual challenges your sporting client is facing. I have also included my ‘sports preparation’ simple tapping (EFT) technique.
Contents:
Preparation for your first client session – their sport.
Understanding you client – the competitor.
All important first client session – questions to ask, what you might expect to come across.
Confidence
Getting ‘in the zone’
Personal barriers to success.
Overtraining and the impact it can have
Setting goals for success
Using the breath
Techniques for releasing poor performances
Dealing with distractions
Setting positive anchors
Stress and Performance
EFT Tapping for Performance
Visualisation
Play like your idol
Inner voice
Assignment
This CPD course includes 10 scripts
CPD: 8 Hours

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2952
Hypnotherapy CPD for Insomnia
Distance Learning
£125
Insomnia is often the result of other issues. In this course we consider the many possible causes and the impact of insomnia. This course also provides a range of techniques and advice for helping your client to sleep well. Included within this is a simple Emotional Freedom Technique (Tapping) routine for your client – as well as tapping diagram.
Contents:
What is insomnia and types of insomnia.
Causes of insomnia
Your first client session – questions to ask/gathering information/understanding your client
Factors to consider – bedroom environment, stress, worry, lifestyle and other factors
Advising your client
Tackling root causes through regression
Techniques to aid sleep
Breathing techniques
Mindfulness exercises
Using Emotional Freedom Technique for Sleep
Resources to provide your client with including sleep guidelines and tapping information
Assignment
This CPD course includes 6 scripts
CPD: 8 Hours

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

Ref No: 2949
Hypnotherapy CPD for Anxiety
Distance Learning
£125
There is no ‘one-size-fits-all’ approach for anxiety, which is why it is important to have a toolbox of techniques but also working through root causes. Anxiety is an area I have had great success with and this course includes many of my personal scripts and a variety of techniques but also guides you through that all important first client session where you gather valuable information.
Contents:
Explanation of Generalised Anxiety Disorder and Specific Anxiety
Symptoms of Anxiety
Fight, Flight, Freeze Responses
The all important first client session
Pre-Talk and Questions for your Client
Added value out of session activities (guiding your client)
Breathing
Setting Anchors
Resolving trauma within the subconscious
Inner Voice
Visualisation
Autogenics
Replacing Negative Thoughts/ Reframing
Mindfulness & Meditation
Circle of Excellence
Empowerment
Assignment
This CPD course includes 7 scripts
CPD: 8 Hours

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 


British Hypnosis Research and Training Institute (Est 1979)

(Stephen Brooks)
Location: Online Distance Learning
 

Ref No: 2955
One Year Practitioner Diploma in Compassionate Ericksonian Hypnotherapy' via Zoom and online study Trainer: Stephen Brooks

Duration: 3 x 3-hour live monthly group sessions on Zoom with Stephen Brooks plus 3 hours of home study each week for one year (approximately 250 + hours in total)
£1975
BHRT offers a one year online distance learning course leading to a Diploma in the Theory and Principles of Ericksonian Hypnotherapy & Counselling.
Over 6000 people have studied on this course and you can now study Ericksonian Hypnotherapy from your home, café or even when sitting on a park bench and learn how to make a genuine difference to the lives of others.
You will be able to help people overcome life-long problems, overcome pain, fears, phobias, weight issues, smoking and lack of confidence. Plus you will be able to do this indirectly in a way that makes others feel they’re responsible for the changes.
Who should attend?
This course is especially designed for people working in healthcare professions like psychotherapists, hypnotherapists, psychologists, doctors, nurses, and social workers. It is also an excellent way for people working in fields such as education, management or entertainment to learn how to communicate more effectively. Some people also take this course for their own personal development.
Course content
This course has a unique concept of multi-level learning; acquiring principles, concepts and structures at the conscious level while developing intuitions, experiences, and creative strategies at the unconscious level.
The online course includes:
•Weekly video lessons about Ericksonian principles, techniques, skills and language patterns
•Monthly videos of hypnosis pioneer Stephen Brooks doing full therapy sessions with clients (over 45 hours of therapy sessions)
•Video commentaries by Stephen Brooks explaining everything that is happening in each of the therapy videos
•Weekly written lessons covering each skill and technique and principle
•Weekly discussion forums covering every lesson
•Ongoing assessment of your work with feedback 3 times a week
•Support from online tutors and previous students
Techniques and skills covered
The course is based on an extensive one year course syllabus covering all of Milton H Erickson’s techniques and skills.
The interventions taught on this course are designed to help people with issues like weight control, smoking, phobias, anxiety, pain control, stage freight, sport performance, self esteem. Depending on your general knowledge and experience as a coach, counsellor or therapist you can apply Ericksonian skills, techniques and language patterns with any psychological, emotional or social problem.
Results
By the end of this course you will be able apply Milton H Erickson’s approach to:
•Establish deep rapport with almost anyone
•Guide people into trance easily and naturally
•Quickly get to the heart of someone’s problem
•Use hypnotic language in hypnotherapy or any other field
•Use hypnotic intervention for problem solving and goal achievement
•Solve your own problems with hypnosis
•Unleash your own unconscious potential and wisdom
Your Trainer – Stephen Brooks
Over the years Stephen Brooks has become one of the most respected hypnotherapists in the world and he has taught many of the biggest names in hypnosis and therapy today. His courses have run in over 20 hospitals and universities and are at the cutting edge of hypnosis training both academically and as skill based trainings. Stephen’s course is not a typical rote learned hypnosis course based on memorising scripts – his course is the most innovative, cutting edge online hypnosis training available, based on years of research and practice.
The online course features techniques, skills and principles that reflect the way that Ericksonian hypnosis has evolved over the past 30 years covering the major problems that can be treated with hypnosis.
Qualification & Accreditation
This course is recognized as an Advanced Level training by the General Hypnotherapy Standards Council of Great Britain, the UK’s major accrediting body for hypnotherapy training.
If you are already a member of the General Hypnotherapy Register, they will elevate your membership to ADVANCED PRACTITIONER status after completing this online course and two years in practice.
Dates and course fee
The course starts on the 1st of every month and runs for one year. The course fee is £1975.00.

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

Sheila Granger
Location: Distance Learning


Ref No: 2953
The Virtual Gastric Band Training Course
Distance Learning
£325
This is the virtual gastric band programme in use by 2500 practitioners in nine countries!
A programme that many practitioners have used to launch a sustainable practice.
This programme has been featured on BBC News, Good morning America, and in local and national papers around the world.
This programme was clinically trialled by Hull/York medical school, we are awaiting the published results.
A client of mine recently featured in the media, not only having lost 11 stones in a mere nine months, but having now kept the weight off for over six years.
In this distance learning course you will learn how to work with this concept effectively, and to tailor it to your clients needs.
This is not a surgical trick but a fully rounded weight loss programme that helps your client develop a new set of habits that they can realistically live with.
Contents:
This training comprises of everything delivered in the ‘in person’ seminars in hard copy including:
•A six DVD set of a full live training seminar with Sheila filmed at a Las Vegas Workshop, which includes a full half day on marketing.
•The Virtual Gastric Band Training Manual – including scripts to use in all sessions
•The Virtual Gastric Band CD with supporting soundtracks as given to clients
•Sheila’s manual on “How To Set Up A Successful Practice” – this is invaluable in helping to ensure your success in delivering the program and building your practice
•Full course certification
•A VGB practitioner logo for your website
•A whiteboard explainer video for use on your website and social media channels
•A website listing so clients can easily find you
Please note: all of these materials will be delivered to you in hard copy and digital downloads and will provide a valuable and unique ongoing resource.
In addition to this, you will be able to have a one-one-one Skype session with Sheila after you have received the materials should you have any questions or queries
CPD: 15 hours

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

Hampshire School of Hypnotherapy

(Lorraine Gleeson)
Location: Distance Learning


Ref No: 2913
Certificate in Hypnotherapy online training
£599
This online training course is for people with an interest in hypnosis and for hypnotherapists who want to further develop their knowledge and skills. The training is designed to be flexible and includes a full manual for you to download. We also provide scripts for you to use and there is even a relaxation MP3 for you to listen to yourself. We provide you with recommended home study exercises to help you to gain some real experience along with the learning.
Hypnotherapy is self-regulated and this online course will give you the tools to set up practice as a hypnotherapist. However, to gain a fully accredited Diploma, you will need to add classroom training.
Course Topics
The course includes the following topics:
•Introduction to Hypnosis
•Theory of Man
•Conscious and Subconscious
•Basic Techniques
•Ideo Motor Response
•Biological basis of hypnosis
•The Basic Formula
•Self-Hypnosis
•Reprogramming
•More advanced Techniques
•Hypno-Neuro linguistic programming
•Specific therapies
•Psychophysiological disorders and medical classifications
•Addiction
Course Toolkit
The course teaches by using a variety of methods, these include:
•Practical role play demonstrations
•Talk through of the topics
•Question and Answer sessions
•Recording to listen to
•Script book to download
•Manual to download
On completion of the online training course, you will be able to download and print off your certificate of completion and will be able to practise as a Hypnotherapist.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2914
Hypno Gastric-Band Online CPD Course
£115
This course is aimed at hypnotherapists who want to learn the specific weight loss system using the Hypno-Gastric Band.
Lorraine Gleeson started using the Hypno-Band system (originated by John Maclean) and was initially licensed in September 2009.
Lorraine further developed the system using additional hypnotherapy and NLP techniques with excellent results.
This system, developed by the Hampshire School of Hypnotherapy, is unique and uses techniques developed over many years of working with many clients with weight problems.
Learning Outcomes:
•How to gather information from your client prior to hypnosis
•How to create New Positive Behaviours using hypnosis
•What Scripts to record for your clients to reinforce their therapy
•Why showing a video of how a surgical Gastric Band is fitted is helpful to your client
•Discussing the scripts you will be using
Also included:
•A practical role play demonstration
•A download for sound effects and DVD of the Gastric Band to show to your clients.
•All scripts for all sessions including scripts to pre-record to give to your clients.
•Script to deliver creating positive changes.
•A download of the Hypno-Gastric Band manual to print off and keep.
On completion of the online training course you will be able to download and print off your certificate of completion and offer the 4-session Hypno-Gastric Band treatment to your clients.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2915
Parts Therapy Online CPD Course
£100
This online training course will enable you to help clients with inner conflicts to find a resolution.
What is parts therapy?
We are all made up of different parts, for example, there is part of us that is a cook, a driver, a parent or teacher. Then there is a part of us that likes to learn or a part of us that is a child another part of us can be serious or a little crazy. Parts can sometimes be referred to as ego states I like to call them parts to keep it simple and easy to understand.
All parts of us are there to protect us and help us to cope with life. However, sometimes we are not happy with a particular part of us. For example, there may be a part of us that wants to promote our business and go out and give talks, and another part of us doesn’t want us to stand up and talk and be seen. Both parts are trying to protect us but are in conflict with each other this is when parts therapy can be a useful tool.
Learning Outcomes:
•What is parts therapy?
•When to use parts therapy
•Pre-talk with your client
•How to establish the IMR (Ideomotor Response)
•Calling out a conflicting Part
•Questioning & maintaining rapport
•Calling out a motivating part
Also Included:
•A practical role play demonstration
•A Script to deliver parts therapy.
•A download of the parts therapy manual to print off and keep.
On completion of the online training course you will be able to download and print off your certificate of completion and will be able to facilitate parts therapy with your clients.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2916
PAST LIFE REGRESSION ONLINE CPD Course
£100
This online training course will enable you to facilitate past life regression with groups and on a one to one with clients.
PLR (past life regression) is not evidence of past lives it is for people that have an interest in experiencing a past life that they may have lived. I do not offer PLR as a therapy to resolve problems today.
Learning Outcomes
•How to work with groups facilitating PLR
•Group Pre-Talk
•Group setting a Nice Place
•Group Journey back through this life
•Group The Journey into Past Lives
•How to facilitate a one-one session
Also Included in This Course
•A practical role play demonstration
•Scripts to facilitate one-one and group PLR
•A download of the PLR manual to print off and keep.
On completion of the online training course you will be able to download and print off your certificate of completion and will be able to facilitate Past Life Regression with groups and one-one.
 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 


The Anglo European College of Therapeutic Hypnosis
(Adam Eason)
Location: Online

Ref No: 2801
Advanced Hypnotherapy Diploma Online Course
£1,140 (inc VAT)
- Offers a clear advancement on your initial hypnotherapy training.
- Encourages academic, critical and reflective thinking on clinical practice, learning and ethics in hypnotherapy.
- Is substantive, distinctive and engaging; not simply ‘more of the same.’
- Provides new knowledge, skills, philosophies, approaches and techniques.
- Encourages a considered, respectful, yet critical approach to hypnotherapy research.
- Develops the practitioner’s extra-clinical abilities e.g. setting up a peer group, reflecting effectively and getting the best from supervision.
- Sets engaging and challenging homework that has practical utility in encouraging use of the skills learnt as well as developing a student’s understanding.
This ONLINE Advanced Hypnotherapy Course uses the video taken at our ten day intensive classroom course.
You are required to have a diploma level qualification for entry onto this accredited course. As well as being accredited CPD with the GHR and the GHSC, you will receive a certification and be able to use the title ‘Advanced Hypnotherapist’ upon working through this course and completing the coursework showing you have achieved the required learning outcomes.
An advanced hypnotherapy diploma needs to build upon and of course, advance existing skills and knowledge.
What’s Included?
- Models of hypnosis and an in depth analysis of theorising in hypnotherapy
Whilst we look at the evidence base for the models and examine the academic underpinnings and critiques of these models, we also debate and discuss the value of the academic approach, how it compares to the reality of the therapy room, and what that means for us as hypnotherapists. We learn and place great emphasis on how to convert knowledge and theory into practical applications that are directly useable in our hypnotherapy sessions.
We also learn how to make that information available to our clients to help them derive as much benefit as possible from hypnotherapy with you. We build greatly upon the existing understanding of hypnosis and how it is conceptualised.
In depth examination of psychological models of change
Beyond hypnosis, we learn about specific models of change that can be very relevant and applicable to the hypnotherapist. We examine highly evidence based models as well as models that are very popular among effective and pioneering therapists and we examine how they apply to hypnotherapy.
We critique and explore the models of change and how they can be used as an underlying philosophy that guides the hypnotherapist. Importantly, we again learn how to implement these models of change into our practical work in the therapy room to advance our own effectiveness and in turn, the benefits derived by the client.
- The underlying factors that facilitate change or hamper the therapeutic process
We closely revisit, scrutinise, build upon and then move beyond rapport and the working alliance. We progress to examining and managing expectations, methods of altering context and advanced ways to set a frame for effective hypnotherapy, we look at personal traits that impede therapy and how to deal with them, we examine extratherapeutic factors and a great deal more
Advanced questioning techniques and strategies
We learn how to use questions therapeutically, how to import questions from a wide variety of disciplines including the fields of coaching, CBT, family therapy, NLP and even explore the fields of philosophy and politics for advanced approaches to questioning techniques, types of questions and how they create change.
We also look at how to use questions to establish working alliance and advance the models of change and hypnosis we have explored in detail.
- Advanced Clinical Approaches
We examine a wide number of interventions that require diploma level understanding and draw upon a number of varying fields. We include many techniques used by some of the most prominent and pioneering therapists in the world. This includes approaches and techniques that require humour and provocation as well as specific approaches to language, and then also more standardised, sober, highly evidence based procedures.
There are many interventions, strategies and techniques here that will greatly advance the repertoire of any hypnotherapist.
- Advanced approaches to specific issues
We go into depth on dealing with some common specific issues – how to construct a treatment plan, the types of interventions to be used, we examine the evidence base, but also go into depth about how to research it for yourself too.
The knowledge of dealing with these specific issues will be transferable to many other conditions cited by your clients. The specific issues have been chosen due to the approach and methodologies employed being applicable to such a broad ranging spectrum of other issues that your clients present in therapy.
- Modern Advances in the Field
You are kept abreast of the up-to-date research, the most important recent breakthroughs and the methodologies used. You will also learn about popular methods that hypnotherapists are getting impressive results with that have little evidence, but have featured in the media or are being made popular by leading trainers and pioneers from the fields of NLP, CBT and hypnotherapy.
You’ll have techniques explained, new applications revealed and the latest concepts explored from the fields of cognitive psychology, neuroscience, academic hypnosis, CBT and how they can be used by hypnotherapists.
- Critical Thinking and Statistics
On this course, you are given insight into the processes that hypnosis scholars and academics employ, how researchers work and how to critically examine the work of academics in relation to the field of hypnotherapy and hypnotism.
We examine myths that pervade the field, we examine how to apply logic but also learn how to challenge academia, become aware of how we accept knowledge and examine the risk of too much personal theorising and investment in singular approaches or stances We also look at how to examine statistics, how they are used in the field of hypnotherapy and how they can be interpreted in a wide variety of ways.
We examine how the media uses statistics and how we can find the best use of statistics to give accurate, impressive and honest information to develop our hypnotherapy businesses and help inform clients and raise their beliefs.
We examine research methodologies and the ways hypnosis has been researched, as well as citing some of the flaws in that research, and of course how to access it – and what conclusions we can draw and also how this effects our practical work in real-life terms.
- Ethics and Ongoing Development
We examine a wide range of ethical issues surrounding the field of hypnotherapy and discover how to exact the highest ethical standards possible within our work.
We examine the ethics behind a number of popular techniques and approaches, how what we do influences our client’s lives beyond therapy, and we also examine how ethics can challenge us on occasion.
We examine in depth the best ways to develop professionally; we examine how to get the very most and best from supervision, reflective practice and CPD.
We then go beyond supervision, reflective practice and CPD and look at other ways to develop your skills, enhance your knowledge, and other avenues to develop your business.
Resources:
You get a manual and lots of handouts as well as being guided towards articles, research papers, and core texts that will help you build and become a fully advanced hypnotherapist.
Accreditation:
This Advanced Practitioner Level training is accredited with the General Hypnotherapy Standards Council (GHSC) and the General Hypnotherapy Register (GHR) and fulfils their requirements for this award.
Qualification:
You’ll receive your certification having attended class, actively participated in class exercises and completed the coursework.
The coursework is a single questionnaire comprising of essay style questions and 4 hypothetical case studies.
Some of the needs for advanced hypnotherapy training are as follows:
- Improve standards and service to the public.
- Engage newly qualified hypnotherapists with quality CPD and to see its value.
- Invigorate and inform the practice of experienced practitioners.
- Encourage higher level, academic and critical thinking.
- Instil the importance of better quality reflective practice.
- Promote new perspectives, build a diversity of approaches.
- Properly understand the the evidence base of the field of hypnotherapy.
- Know the literature well – it underpins our practical skills and advances them in turn.
- To become a more successful hypnotherapist whose clients derive greater gains and successful benefits.
Hypnotherapists are not the only ones who benefit from this, by becoming better at what they do, they get to raise the standards of the field in general terms, this is good for us all because the perception of the public becomes better and rosier and it is better for clients who derive more gain, more professionalism, better results.
The raison d’être of an advanced hypnotherapy training programme is to offer the hypnotherapist a clear advancement on the original hypnotherapy training. It needs to be substantive, wholly distinctive and healthily challenging, not simply offering ‘more of the same’ that was taught on an initial diploma course. it provides new knowledge, new skills, new philosophies, new approaches, new techniques and encourages a considered, respectful and healthily critical exploration of hypnotherapy research.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2802
Cognitive Behavioural Hypnotherapy Certification Course Online
£656.40 (inc VAT)
If you are already qualified as a hypnotherapist and wish to advance your skills and are interested in learning more about Cognitive-Behavioural Hypnotherapist (CBH) approaches to patient care, then this is an excellent opportunity to obtain that level of qualification and expand your skills as an evidence based hypnosis clinician.
This training course contains video recordings of the intensive 5-day classroom training, supplemented with comprehensive learning materials.
CBH Course Curriculum:
This is a strongly evidence based course and incorporates a wide range of studies and research into the syllabus. Though evidence demonstrates that hypnosis can advance the efficacy of some CBT techniques when combined, Cognitive behavioural hypnotherapy is not just an amalgam of CBT plus hypnosis, not at all. You’ll learn in this course that the cognitive behavioural approach to hypnotherapy pre-exists the work of CBT pioneers Ellis and Beck, for example.
Likewise, we draw from the substantial contributions to the field of cognitive behavioural therapy and hypnotherapy from a wide range of authors.
Here is some of what you will learn:
- Cognitive-Behavioural Theories of Hypnosis
- An Understanding of the Underlying Philosophy of the Cognitive Behavioural Approach to Therapy
- Mindfulness-Based Therapeutic Interventions
- Incorporate ACT (Acceptance & Commitment Therapy) into your client work.
- Cognitive Behavioural Uses Of Relaxation Skills including Hypnotic Desensitisation
- Cognitive Behavioural Hypnotherapeutic Questioning Techniques
- A Range of Approaches and Uses of CBT Thought Forms
- Cognitive Disputation and Cognitive Restructuring Methods
- A Wide Range of Mental Imagery Techniques
- Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy Approaches
- Variety of Exposure Interventions
- Consultation and Assessment Methods of Cognitive Behavioural Hypnotherapy
Your online video tuition is supplemented with the following:
- Comprehensive course manual
- Class handouts
- Scripts for a wide range of standardised interventions so that you can see how researchers worded specific methodologies.
- There is a core, recommended text to invest in and supplement your course notes and you will receive a thorough, recommended reading list upon successful enrolment for this course.
Evidence Base:
Hypnotherapy has a very impressive evidence base.
Many front-line hypnotherapists are still very unaware of the breadth and depth of that evidence base. Many are still using processes and techniques that they have been taught that carry no evidence at all and wondering why they are not getting the most impressive results in therapy. Remember, results get you more clients and an impressive reputation.
The cognitive behavioural approach to hypnotherapy offers strongly evidence-based techniques and strategies.
- It has academic underpinning which stands up to scrutiny and peer-review.
- It offers you a very responsible and ethical way to treat clients.
- Easier to establish working relationships with conventional medical professionals.
You get a lot of standardised scripts to employ within your professional practice straight away or to see how these protocols were used in the context of research, but you also learn strategies and protocols that require no script at all.
There is a coursework questionnaire as part of the assessment to complete following the video tuition. There is then a requirement for you to submit two written case studies demonstrating the cognitive-behavioural hypnotherapy approach.
Entry Requirements:
In order to qualify as a delegate for this course, you are required to hold a diploma level qualification in hypnotherapy.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2803
Hypnotic Coaching Online Course
£594 (inc VAT)
You are required to have a diploma level qualification for entry onto this accredited course.
As well as counting as CPD with the GHR, you will receive a certification and be able to use the title ‘Hypnotic Coach’ upon full completion of this course and the case study based coursework.
What is hypnotic coaching?
I think of it as transformational life coaching that is turbo charged. Deep, powerful transformational coaching gets combined and punctuated with hypnosis and hypnotherapy skills to enable the hypnotic coach to work with very different people than hypnotherapists typically do. Let me explain a bit more.
Powerful, Profound, Deep Transformational Coaching
“My mission in life is not merely to survive, but to thrive; and to do so with some passion, some compassion, some humor, and some style.” – Maya Angelou
This is a favourite quote of mine and one which guides me at times. I encounter lots of people who love this quote and for whom it makes a lot of sense, but do not feel it. That is, they do not feel as if they are truly excelling, or they have perhaps reached a plateau in life and are ready to move on to the next level in their own personal evolution. Hypnotic coaching helps people looking to do just that.
According to Eric Schmidt, the executive chairman of Google “Everyone needs a coach.”
I have a coach. If you want to achieve in sports, you have a coach. When you want to sing well, you have a coach. When you want to act well, you have a coach. When you want to achieve more, you have a coach.
Coaching is now recognised more and more as an essential element in anyone’s personal and professional development and more companies than ever have their leaders and executives coached. The vast majority of people I know who truly thrive in life have a coach. This is a vast market place that hypnotherapists can tap into as a result of the skills and knowledge learned on this five day course.
Some of the problems that hypnotherapists face today are overcome with hypnotic coaching:
– Hypnotherapists spend all day working with clients who have therapeutic issues such as depression, anxiety, pain and as a result it can be tough and challenging for the therapist not to be weighed down by it; some even burnout if not supported and supervised effectively. A hypnotic coach works with people looking to achieve more, who are often already in a good place in life, and who want to take their life to the next level. It is upbeat with an often lighter tone that is refreshing and helps punctuate the hypnotherapists working week with something quite different. This can be an invigorating tonic for a hypnotherapist.
– Hypnotherapists often work in a limited provincial market place, competing with numerous other local hypnotherapists for clients. Hypnotic coaching opens the world up for you, you can work with anyone, anywhere.
– Hypnotherapy is typically a brief therapy that means hypnotherapists are required to keep seeking out new clients. Hypnotic coaching is a longer term process whereby you develop a longer term working relationship with your paying coaching clients. Most coaches work with their clients for a minimum of 3 months and many I know have 12 month contracts with their coaching clients.
– Once a client is healed, the hypnotherapy quite rightly comes to an end. With hypnotic coaching, the opportunity exists to keep on reaching higher and looking for more to achieve and successfully actualise in life. You are likely to work together for longer.
– There are less ‘affordability’ issues or financial ethics concerns. Most of the time, success as a result of working with a hypnotic coach results in the coaching client being rewarded financially (through promotions or business innovation, for example) and are happy to maintain the relationship without financial quibbles. What’s more, hypnotic coaches do tend to charge much higher fees for their coaching work than the fees charged by therapists.
Hypnotic coaching is incredibly effective and can add another revenue stream to the hypnotherapists income Learning hypnotic coaching helps you to expand your business and ethically increase the time you spend with rewarding, achieving, positive clients.
Additionally, as alluded to earlier here, hypnotic coaching tends to be more upbeat, more active and quite a contrast to the typical therapeutic environment – it can serve as quite a tonic and subsequently helps the hypnotherapist to be even more effective when working with therapy clients.
With hypnotic coaching, your clients are people who are healthy, well and simply want to be better, achieve more, take their life to the next level. This course gives you the tools and structure to add to your existing hypnotherapy skills and open up a whole new exciting world of possibility.
Hypnotic coaching is totally portable and can be conducted from anywhere in the world that you have access to a phone or the internet, technology ensures that our potential client base is everyone and anyone who is connected – and we are currently more connected to the world than at any previous point in history. It makes absolute sense for us to capitalise upon that – and reach out and help more people achieve their dreams.
The Training:
This online training course has a number of practical skills offered that you also get to apply to yourself and as a result can be highly beneficial personally and help you develop your business further and take action to enhancing your own life at the same time.
Here is a small taste of what you’ll learn on this course:
– A wide and comprehensive range of coaching techniques and strategies from a mixed and diverse range of therapy disciplines, psychology schools and coaching backgrounds.
– A whole new world of questioning techniques drawn from diverse fields that form a core component of effective coaching.
– How to market your hypnotic coaching and how to develop your business in such a way that it brings you an ongoing additional revenue stream.
– A guideline for how to structure a course of hypnotic coaching with your clients so that you maximise the effectiveness of your coaching sessions.
– How to incorporate your existing hypnotism skills into your coaching work.
– A number of coaching specific communication skills that will bring out the best in your clients.
– Key principles that underpin a successful coaching relationship; you’ll learn how to use humour, provocation, as well as knowing how to give your client the truth that everybody else is afraid to tell them.
– You’ll learn evidence-based techniques, popular coaching strategies and you’ll also learn what the most effective, pioneering and impressive coaches in the world do in their sessions.
– How to format coaching sessions and how to structure a programme of coaching to meet the needs of your client and make sure that it serves them in the best way possible.
– How to create winning proposals for prospective clients and ensure that you convert as many opportunities into paying clients as possible.
Online Format
The online course contains videos taken of the classroom teaching. It includes sections of formal teaching where underlying rationale, theory and principles are taught, demonstrated and explored. It has equal amounts of practical applications and opportunities to apply the skills.
The nature of the subject is reflected in the way we teach this course. The course is upbeat, interactive, open, with a lot of fun exercises that punctuate the teaching and demonstrations. We have a community website where you will be able to meet other students and organise sessions online – via Skype etc to practice the skills.
Learning Materials:
You get a manual and lots of handouts as well as being guided towards articles, papers, and core texts that will help you to become an effective hypnotic coach.
Qualification:
You’ll receive your certification having studied the online course materials, advised us that you have actively participated in practical exercises and completed the case study-based coursework.

 

Book Now          Contact us

Ref No: 2804
Hypnotherapist Business Development Academy Online Course
£300 (inc VAT)
Every hypnotherapist should and can be running an effective, prosperous, flourishing business. Join this academy programme to develop your business, to help you achieve the dreams you have for your business or to simply take your hypnotherapy business to the next level.
This programme is for practicing professional hypnotherapists. It is run entirely online so you can enjoy it from the comfort of your own home or office wherever you are in the world. Each lesson is accompanied by written notes, guidelines and instructions to help you derive the most gain from each session.
Is The Course Right For You?
Have you struggled to get clients?
Do you love being a hypnotherapist but question if it is a viable full-time career?
Do you want to reach more people and make more of a positive impact upon the world?
Have sought solutions from experts that did not deliver?
Are you conflicted?
Feeling pain as a result?
I once felt exactly that way too!
I have been a full-time hypnotherapy professional since 1997. When I started out, I was in my early 20s, with very little life experience, a pretty poor education in hypnotherapy (unbeknownst to me at the time), no entrepreneurial skills or knowledge, and I struggled, boy did I ever struggle!
I was paying for advertising, paying for expensive offices in Central London, paying for professional memberships, paying for insurance, paying for a website, and that is before I even mention the cost of living and leading a life to feel good about! I got into a lot of debt, verging on Bankruptcy, my business was unsustainable, I was within a hair’s breadth of packing it in and returning to full-time employment as my family, friends, accountant and bank manager were all urging me to do.
It was a desperate time for me and gives me butterflies just recollecting it today. It felt like swimming in treacle, but tasted far worse. I put so much effort in, but was getting nowhere. I loved the field of hypnotherapy, but was getting nowhere. I could not understand it.
My last few pounds were spent on getting assistance from someone who coached me, mentored me and guided me, and things changed. I soaked up the advice, we explored what I was doing, I investigated and spoke to successful therapists, I studied what made people a success in this field. I got out of debt and learned how I could do what I wanted to do – to help others using hypnotherapy and earn a healthy living with a good lifestyle.
And so, some 20 years later, I am still a hypnotherapist. I have complete life autonomy.
I am a bestselling author in the field of hypnosis. My hypnosis audios sell globally. My work has featured on primetime television. My podcasts are among the most popular in the world (in this field). I run and own one of the most respected training colleges for hypnotherapy in the world – and my college graduates go on to have very successful careers in this field too.
I learned how to love the business of being a hypnotherapist. I learned how to attract clients. I honed it beautifully. Today I choose how I live as a result. I have been through two major economic crises while continuing to thrive and continuing to grow my hypnotherapy business.
What NOT To Do
The way in which hypnotherapists try to build their businesses absolutely baffles me, and I can tell you a few things for sure:
Getting provincial newspaper features do not fill you therapy rooms with clients, yet so many people seem desperate to do this type of thing.
There is no fixed answer that fits every hypnotherapist all of the time and there are no gurus to be found who have a singular answer that is right for you. Absolutely not.
Spending hours on your website are often wasted hours. Some of the busiest and most successful hypnotherapists in the world have terrible websites with very poor search engine rankings.
Having the slickest business cards and company logo will not pay for the lifestyle you really want.
You don’t need to spend hours mastering social media.
Trying to keep up with the latest advancements in technology is impossible.
You don’t need an advertising or PR budget and should not be paying for any advertising.
Being a hypnotherapist should not be stressful and should not lead to you needing therapy more than your clients.
Building your hypnotherapy business can be invigorating, fun and enjoyable.
In the last two decades, times have changed. The perception of the field of hypnotherapy has changed, there are more hypnotherapists out there than ever before, there is more information available about hypnotherapy than ever before. Things continue to change, rapidly. Just as we all engage in continued professional development to keep our skills relevant, fresh and up-to-date, so we need to understand how to develop our business effectively and how to keep attracting clients.
Today, I encounter many, many hypnotherapists at lectures, conferences, CPD trainings and other events. So, so many of them struggle. So, so many of them ask me the best ways to get clients, but it is virtually impossible to offer up a soundbite in a tea break that will transform them from desperate, isolated, eager hypnotherapist into successful, commanding professional with a healthy waiting list of referred clients.
The Solution?
You want to see more clients. You want to excel as a busy hypnotherapist. You want kudos. You want to serve the world and help as many people as possible to be well and benefit from what you know hypnotherapy can do You want these things and probably more besides; so what is the solution?
Be mentored.
Be coached.
Join this hypnotherapist business development academy.
Here’s a couple of the reasons why:
You learn from experience. Not just the experience of success, but also you learn from the often incredibly expensive, painful experience of your mentor.
You’ll have the support of your colleagues in the group and along with me you’ll be held accountable by them all as you become productive and advance your business.
You get to rigorously explore your existing approach.
You’ll get some truth. Often truth that is hard to swallow.
You get motivation. You’ll be fired up and inspired to learn how to triumph as a hypnotherapist.
You get insight.
You get to tap in to success.
You get to access your potential while someone holds your hand.
You’ll be held accountable and will make exponentially more effort than you realise was needed.
You’ll take massive, effective action that will send ripples into the world.
You’ll learn how to highly productive without necessarily expending a huge amount more effort.
You get to laugh and feel the full force of joy that can be had within such an academy of professional peers who all have the same goal as you.
Join us for our year-long online business development academy.
Yo are not given direct instructions, you are not made promises and you are not given any secrets to untold riches that you follow in robot fashion. You’ll explore, you’ll journey, you’ll discover and you’ll enter the world of enormous possibility.
You see, so many hypnotherapists do not spend enough time doing the right things. Those that actually do spend any time on business development are doing it highly passively, highly ineffectually and it is an impotent process. They end up being forgettable, unnoticeable, blending into the mass of hypnotherapists out there all doing pretty much the same thing, charging pretty much the same fees as each other, fighting it out for the very few clients who are actually surfing the net looking at therapists rather than taking a quality referral.
It pains me to encounter so many incredibly talented, dedicated, wonderful hypnotherapists who simply cannot make ends meet and end up abandoning the field, or worse, abandoning their dreams. This is all because they did not know any better and ended up following the norms that every other hypnotherapist does. You don’t want to be satisfied and relieved to just make ends meet, often seeming desperate for business in the eyes of clients, you want to thrive, excel and be in love with being a hypnotherapist.
If you love working in this field, have a passion for hypnotherapy but are struggling to make it work, then that can change. The reality is that it is relatively simple to build a healthy business and a liberating, satisfying, inspiring career as a hypnotherapist.

Book Now          Contact us

 

 

 

The Therapists’ Business School
Venue:
Distance Learning

 

Ref No: 2583
Business Success Course
Distance Learning
£300
The secrets of creating a successful therapy business.
Are you struggling to attract enough clients? Are you worrying about money? Are you feeling uncertain?
It is a great shame if you are working as a therapist, doing the job you love, and yet finding it difficult to keep the business afloat. This is a very common problem. There’s nothing worse than worrying about how to pay your rent or your insurance, being upset when clients cancel, or even worse, having to give up on your dream and find another job.
The Business Success Course will give you the tools you need to build a thriving, successful, busy therapy practice. Broken into four weekly modules, the online course covers how to change your mind set, how to market your business and how to grow your business.
The course has been created using the experience of several successful therapists.
The Business Success Course will:
* Teach you how to be a successful business person
* Give you a variety of marketing strategies
* Allow you to build a thriving practice
* Stop you worrying about money
* Allow you to work as a therapist as your main job
* Give you free time
* Allow you to manage your work around your other commitments
* Help you to earn a good income
* Allow you the satisfaction of helping people
* Show you how to establish a good reputation
* Give you the skills to be your own boss
The Business Success Course is £300. This includes:
* 4 weekly modules
* Workbook
* MP3s

 

Book Now          Contact us

 

 


SherpaNLP, Executive Coaching and Training
(Rod Beaumont)
Location: Webinar
 

Ref No: 2458
Developing and Marketing YOUR Coaching, NLP or Hypnotherapy Business

Webinar
£150
You have enrolled or even completed the training courses.
You are solidifying your niche.
You are looking for clients.
The market reality however is fighting your every move.
Discover how to create and execute an effective and successful small business in the Life Coaching, Hypnotherapy or NLP area.
Discover techniques – tried and proven, that work and will establish you locally or further afield.
Leave the course with a solid plan, a solid business foundation that you can now execute and see immediate changes. This is not based on an American guru or written with those who have thousands ‘lying around’ to invest. This IS based upon your understanding of the market, your effectiveness in social media, your professionalising and effectiveness of your web site. It empowers YOU to lead your own campaign and see immediate changes in your success rates.
There are two ways to participate in this course:
A weekend intensive course where you will get everything you need in two days – hands on – development.
A twice a month INTERACTIVE webinar over 3 months.
Both courses offering CPD credits as well as detailed manuals and CD resources.
Many new coaches, hypnotherapists and NLP Practitioners find their transition into ‘self employment’ difficult at first. As a coach, NLP Practitioner or Hypnotherapist you are virtually always self-employed. That makes a huge difference because it’s well-known that starting up in any form of self-employment is a major challenge and most new small businesses don’t last more than a year or two. The problem is YOU are all to painfully aware of that fact, and despite your best intentions you have the fear of failure, the fear of losing everything you have or are investing in your training because your business won’t succeed. When you STOP being distracted by that negative you unleash your potential and succeed. There are in fact many reasons why YOU have an advantage in setting up a new business compared to other fields:
* There is an identified a market for coaching, NLP and Hypnotherapy across the country that exceeds the supply of confident and competent therapists
* The cost of training can be relatively low compared to other businesses and much quicker in time invested
* Business start-up costs are relatively low, although they may run into several thousand pounds, that’s much less than most other businesses
* Initially you can work from home or rent by the hour a small consulting room
* You have flexibility as to where and when you work, as well as who you work with!
* There are many different levels and strands of service and product that you can offer
* Day to Day overheads are relatively low
* Clients make payments per session or prior to sessions and bulk booking rates can make payment in advance most attractive which which prevents the cash flow problems encountered in many other businesses
I have been ‘self employed’ for more than 25 years around the world! Short or long term contracts, consulting and development contracts. One thing that’s particularly clear to me from my experience as a successful coach, NLP Master Practitioner and Trainer as well as a Master Hypnotherapy practitioner and trainer is that there are two types of ‘self employed’ in our business – those people who have a background in running a small business, or who are familiar with marketing or PR, very often tend to succeed very quickly as therapists, even if they’re not the most experienced, knowledgeable or skilled practitioners. Secondly some very good therapists who attract very few clients because they don’t know how to run a business and manage their own practice successfully. The mistakes they make typically are basic, though, from a business perspective, easily resolved by changing their frame and focus.
So join me for the weekend or for the webinar and experience these changes IMMEDIATELY.
What IS Covered?
Among the themes covered are:
* The principles of marketing – and how it should effect everything you do to promote the business from how to dress to what to say when you answer the phone, as well as more formal advertising.
* The press release – not just how to write one, what to include and what to leave out, but also how to follow it up to make sure it gets read and acted on.
* How to get on radio and TV – tips to get airtime on local media including what the programme makers want and what the law says about hypnosis and broadcasting.
* The important rules and guidelines – how journalists should treat you according to their professional rulebook, the law on libel and what you can and cannot say when you advertise.
* How to create referrals to build a practice – using existing clients, other complementary therapists and contacts in the local community.
* How to choose where to work – the pros and cons of where to practice and how to make your home client-friendly if you decide to see clients there.
* How to set your fees for your local market – not just setting the right price but how to deflect questions about cost and the best ways to handle payments.
* Making your website work for you – covering the best practice in website design, how to describe yourself to clients, why its important to manage your own content.
* How coaching, NLP and Hypnotherapy differs from other therapies – and what that means for how to market the business.
* The principles of advertising – the tried and tested guidelines that therapists need to be aware of.
* The most effective paid-for advertising – display adverts or small ads, door-to-door leafleting or adwords. Where to spend an advertising budget to get the best return.
* Advertising for no-cost or low-cost – designing and printing publicity material.
* Plus – dealing with clients who miss appointments, how to use social networking, handling telephone enquiries and MUCH more.
Experience YOUR SUCCESS IMMEDIATELY.

 

Book Now          Contact us  

 

Ref No: 2493
ON LINE International Coach Certificate – ACCREDITED
Every 2 weeks by appointment
Webinars & Skype
2 hour sessions for webinar and 1 hour sessions for tutorials
This course is spread out over 3 – 6 months
Course Fee £750
Deposit £250
Monthly Installments £250 x 2
ACCREDITED – Professional Coaching Alliance – International Coach Certification.
The International Coaching Certification PCA is the best training alternative for professionals seeking to improve their current career or develop a new occupation working on supporting and training people.
Our training programs focus on learning processes that really add value to the personal and professional development of participants, and do so efficiently and effectively.
Coaching is a methodology that enables an effective change that through facilitating allows to achieve objectives efficiently and effectively, so why should the curriculum be long and inefficient? Our training programs are conducted in a short period of time, getting transmitted through a clear, focused, real learning and high impact methodology.
Get a world-class certification granted by the international leader in Integrative Coaching. Welcome to Professional Coaching Alliance.
Via webinar & Skype:
For the first time we will be offering all our courses via online interactive coaching and tutoring. Often students cannot pull everything together for the course price, the accommodation, meals away from home and the travel costs. Quite often the ‘everything else’ is more than the cost of the course! Now you can participate in any of our courses via a blend of:
Webinars
1:1 Skype Sessions
Small Group Skype Sessions
CD Support materials
Manuals and worksheets
Observed guided practice.
This open us more flexibility to you and through that more success opportunities.
Here is the ‘Bread and Butter’ of the program...
A program that transforms your career and your life.
Live an experience of accelerated personal and professional growth, with coaches of the highest international standard.
Participant’s profile:
The International Coaching Certification is intended for all those wishing to learn the skills that should lead to become a professional coach, for those looking to improve their current career or develop in this way a new widely recognized profession.
For those wishing to develop their communication skills and ability to work effectively with people, adding value to the processes of growth of individuals, teams and organizations through coaching.
Skills:
During this training participants of the International Certification program can learn and develop the following skills:
* Fundamentals and principles of coaching.
* Integrative Knowledge Coaching Model.
* Development of high impact communication skills.
* Treatment of individuals and groups.
* Precision in language use to improve performance.
* Improve the performance of individuals and teams.
* Design objectives and goal compliance.
* Assistance to increase motivation.
* And much more…
Courses running year round; individually tailored to meet your circumstances leading to efficient, professional training with clients leaving feeling competent and professionally empowered.
All from the comfort of your own home.

 

Book Now          Contact us  

 

 

 

Anglo European College of Therapeutic Hypnosis (Adam Eason)
(Adam Eason)

Location: Distance Learning

Online Advanced Hypnotherapy Training with The Adam Eason School of Therapeutic Hypnosis.
Online video footage with over 175 hours of hypnotherapy skills and knowledge tuition. Including diploma level hypnotherapy training, rapid inductions training and specialist workshops aimed at developing understanding and practical skills of hypnotherapy and hypnosis. £45.00 per month.
To enrol or for further details visit: http://www.adam-eason.com/members/platinum-2/


Online Business Mentoring For Hypnotherapists with Adam Eason School of Therapeutic Hypnosis.
Online tuition and business development programme designed specifically for hypnotherapists, based on the principles of Adam's own successful online business and marketing of the last 15 years. Aimed at helping you develop your hypnotherapy business and earning potential using a range of online strategies detailed and laid out within this ongoing mentoring programme. £15.00 per month.
To enrol or for further details visit: http://www.adam-eason.com/members/business-mentoring-for-therapists-2/

 

 

 

 

Sussex Hypnotherapy Centre
(Daniel Jones)
Location: Distance Learning

Certificate in Ericksonian Hypnotherapy
Distance Learning
GHR Discounted Price: $49. Usual Investment: $197.
View details and purchase at: https://www.udemy.com/certificate-in-ericksonian-hypnotherapy/?couponCode=GHR2014

Introduction to Solution Focused Therapy
Distance Learning
GHR Discounted Price: $19. Usual Investment: $79.
View details and purchase at: https://www.udemy.com/introduction-to-solution-focused-therapy/?couponCode=GHR2014

How to Make Passive Online Income Writing Books and eBooks
Distance Learning
GHR Discounted Price: $37. Usual Investment: $149.
View details and purchase at: https://www.udemy.com/how-to-make-passive-online-income-writing-books-ebooks/?couponCode=GHR2014

 

 
 

 

Disclaimer

We accept no liability or responsibility whatsoever for the quality of any products featured or the accuracy of any claims made, or the content, administration or cancellation of any listed course. Delegates should fully satisfy themselves via the relevant Professional Associations for the respective modalities that: 1. Claims made by course providers with regard to the standing of any qualifications awarded are correct  2. Attendance at any listed course will count towards annual CPD requirements.

 

HOME